Cad Wor X Plant Users Guide
Cad Wor X Plant Users Guide
Cad Wor X Plant Users Guide
August 2014
DICAS-PE-200007D
Copyright
Copyright 2003-2014 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved. Intergraph is part of Hexagon.
Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains
confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and
international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization from Intergraph Corporation.
Documentation
Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form, User's Guides, Installation Guides, Reference Guides,
Administrator's Guides, Customization Guides, Programmer's Guides, Configuration Guides and Help Guides delivered with a
particular software product.
Other Documentation
Other Documentation shall mean, whether in electronic or printed form and delivered with software or on Intergraph Smart Support,
SharePoint, or box.net, any documentation related to work processes, workflows, and best practices that is provided by Intergraph
as guidance for using a software product.
Terms of Use
a.
Use of a software product and Documentation is subject to the End User License Agreement ("EULA") delivered with the
software product unless the Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation. If the
Licensee has a valid signed license for this software product with Intergraph Corporation, the valid signed license shall take
precedence and govern the use of this software product and Documentation. Subject to the terms contained within the
applicable license agreement, Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a reasonable number of copies of the
Documentation as defined in the applicable license agreement and delivered with the software product for Licensee's internal,
non-commercial use. The Documentation may not be printed for resale or redistribution.
b.
For use of Documentation or Other Documentation where end user does not receive a EULA or does not have a valid license
agreement with Intergraph, Intergraph grants the Licensee a non-exclusive license to use the Documentation or Other
Documentation for Licensees internal non-commercial use. Intergraph Corporation gives Licensee permission to print a
reasonable number of copies of Other Documentation for Licensees internal, non-commercial. The Other Documentation may
not be printed for resale or redistribution. This license contained in this subsection b) may be terminated at any time and for any
reason by Intergraph Corporation by giving written notice to Licensee.
Disclaimer of Warranties
Except for any express warranties as may be stated in the EULA or separate license or separate terms and conditions, Intergraph
Corporation disclaims any and all express or implied warranties including, but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability
and fitness for a particular purpose and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed
a modification or amendment of such disclaimer. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its
publication date.
The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable
technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.
The software, Documentation and Other Documentation discussed in this document are furnished under a license and may be used
or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL
EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.
Intergraph is not responsible for the accuracy of delivered data including, but not limited to, catalog, reference and symbol data.
Users should verify for themselves that the data is accurate and suitable for their project work.
Limitation of Damages
IN NO EVENT WILL INTERGRAPH CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL INCIDENTAL,
SPECIAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, LOSS OF USE OR PRODUCTION, LOSS OF
REVENUE OR PROFIT, LOSS OF DATA, OR CLAIMS OF THIRD PARTIES, EVEN IF INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN
ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL INTERGRAPH CORPORATIONS LIABILITY EXCEED THE AMOUNT THAT
INTERGRAPH CORPORATION HAS BEEN PAID BY LICENSEE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT AT THE TIME THE CLAIM IS
MADE. EXCEPT WHERE PROHIBITED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NO CLAIM, REGARDLESS OF FORM, ARISING OUT OF OR IN
CONNECTION WITH THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS DOCUMENT MAY BE BROUGHT BY LICENSEE MORE THAN TWO (2)
YEARS AFTER THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO THE CAUSE OF ACTION HAS OCCURRED.
IF UNDER THE LAW RULED APPLICABLE ANY PART OF THIS SECTION IS INVALID, THEN INTERGRAPH LIMITS ITS
LIABILITY TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT ALLOWED BY SAID LAW.
Export Controls
Intergraph Corporations software products and any third-party Software Products obtained from Intergraph Corporation, its
subsidiaries, or distributors (including any Documentation, Other Documentation or technical data related to these products) are
subject to the export control laws and regulations of the United States. Diversion contrary to U.S. law is prohibited. These Software
Products, and the direct product thereof, must not be exported or re-exported, directly or indirectly (including via remote access)
under the following circumstances:
a.
To Cuba, Iran, North Korea, Sudan, or Syria, or any national of these countries.
b.
To any person or entity listed on any U.S. government denial list, including but not limited to, the U.S. Department of Commerce
Denied Persons, Entities, and Unverified Lists, http://www.bis.doc.gov/complianceandenforcement/liststocheck.htm, the U.S.
Department of Treasury Specially Designated Nationals List, http://www.treas.gov/offices/enforcement/ofac/, and the U.S.
Department of State Debarred List, http://www.pmddtc.state.gov/compliance/debar.html.
c.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, the end use of the Software Product is related to the design,
development, production, or use of missiles, chemical, biological, or nuclear weapons, or other un-safeguarded or sensitive
nuclear uses.
d.
To any entity when Licensee knows, or has reason to know, that an illegal reshipment will take place.
Any questions regarding export or re-export of these Software Products should be addressed to Intergraph Corporations Export
Compliance Department, Huntsville, Alabama 35894, USA.
Trademarks
Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, CADWorx, and CAESAR II are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation or its
subsidiaries in the United States, and other countries. Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
Oracle, JD Edwards, PeopleSoft, and Retek are registered trademarks of Oracle Corporation, and/or its affiliates. AutoCAD,
ObjectARX, and RealDWG are trademarks of Autodesk. HOOPS is a trademark of Tech Soft 3D, L.L.C. Other brands, and product
names are trademarks of their respective owners.
CADWorx Design Review contains Autodesk RealDWG by Autodesk, Inc., copyright Autodesk, Inc. All rights reserved.
Autodesk, Inc., 111 McInnis Parkway, San Rafael, California 94903 ("Autodesk") is a third-party beneficiary to this Agreement to the
extent that the Software Product contains RealDWG, and to the extent that the provisions herein relate to Licensees use of the
Software Product containing RealDWG. Such provisions are made expressly for the benefit of Autodesk, and are enforceable by
Autodesk in addition to Intergraph.
Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................ 17
Conventions .......................................................................................................................................... 17
Technical Support ................................................................................................................................. 18
What's New in Plant .............................................................................................................................. 21
Obsolete Commands ...................................................................................................................... 22
Online Help ........................................................................................................................................... 23
Setup ........................................................................................................................................................... 25
Startup Defaults .................................................................................................................................... 25
Support Directory .................................................................................................................................. 25
MVSetup ............................................................................................................................................... 25
Setup Size/Spec Panel .............................................................................................................................. 27
Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 28
Configuration Settings .................................................................................................................... 31
Set Specification and Size .............................................................................................................. 46
Configuration Layers ...................................................................................................................... 47
Piping Rules ................................................................................................................................... 49
Convert Legacy Drawing ................................................................................................................ 55
Specification and Size ........................................................................................................................... 59
Optional Items ....................................................................................................................................... 59
Optional Component Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 59
Size ....................................................................................................................................................... 60
Spec ...................................................................................................................................................... 60
Size-Spec .............................................................................................................................................. 61
All .......................................................................................................................................................... 61
Editor ..................................................................................................................................................... 61
Change Size.......................................................................................................................................... 61
Change the size automatically ....................................................................................................... 62
Change the size manually .............................................................................................................. 63
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically ............................................................ 63
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually ................................................................... 64
Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically.............................................. 64
Change tee sizes automatically...................................................................................................... 65
Change tee sizes manually ............................................................................................................ 66
Change Specification ............................................................................................................................ 68
Change the specification automatically .......................................................................................... 68
Change the specification manually................................................................................................. 69
Change the specification of a model with branches automatically ................................................. 70
Local Edit .............................................................................................................................................. 70
Modify a component ....................................................................................................................... 72
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box .............................................................................................................. 73
Component Custom Data Dialog Box ............................................................................................ 78
Global Edit............................................................................................................................................. 79
Modify multiple components ........................................................................................................... 80
Custom Data Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 80
Contents
Mode Convert........................................................................................................................................ 81
Convert a component to a different mode ...................................................................................... 82
3D Solids ........................................................................................................................................ 82
Convert Isometric ........................................................................................................................... 82
2D Double Line ............................................................................................................................... 82
2D Single Line ................................................................................................................................ 82
Convert Existing ............................................................................................................................. 83
Convert to 3D enhanced................................................................................................................. 83
Convert from project data ............................................................................................................... 83
Convert Intersected Piping ............................................................................................................. 84
CWexplode ..................................................................................................................................... 84
Socket Weld .......................................................................................................................................... 84
Threaded ............................................................................................................................................... 84
Settings ................................................................................................................................................. 85
XREF Edit ............................................................................................................................................. 85
Palettes Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 87
Spec View Palette ................................................................................................................................. 88
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) ............................................................................. 88
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette).................................................................................. 90
Custom Data Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) ......................................................................... 91
Line View Palette .................................................................................................................................. 91
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ............................................................................. 92
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) ......................................................................................... 93
Line View Isolation Properties Manager ......................................................................................... 93
Support Modeler Palette ....................................................................................................................... 94
Insert a pipe support ....................................................................................................................... 96
Insert an elbow support .................................................................................................................. 96
Insert a tee support......................................................................................................................... 97
Insert multiple pipe supports .......................................................................................................... 97
Edit Pipe Support Features ............................................................................................................ 98
Insulation View Palette ........................................................................................................................ 100
Settings Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) ........................................................................ 101
Apply Tab (CADWorx Insulation View Palette) ............................................................................ 102
Discontinuity View Palette ................................................................................................................... 104
Pipe Support Report ........................................................................................................................... 106
P&ID View Palette ............................................................................................................................... 107
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette)............................................................................... 107
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View Palette) .......................................................................... 110
Insert a drawing into the project ................................................................................................... 110
Clash View Palette .............................................................................................................................. 111
Options Dialog Box ....................................................................................................................... 112
Layers Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 113
Assembly View Palette ....................................................................................................................... 113
Create an assembly...................................................................................................................... 114
Edit an assembly .......................................................................................................................... 114
Delete an assembly from the Assembly Manager ........................................................................ 115
Insert an assembly into the drawing ............................................................................................. 115
Edit an assembly path .................................................................................................................. 115
Contents
ISOGEN Panel .......................................................................................................................................... 117
ISOGEN Out ....................................................................................................................................... 118
Extract ISOGEN files .................................................................................................................... 120
Enable the Repeatability return report.......................................................................................... 120
Setup short description column for material list with text wrapping ............................................. 121
Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics...................................................................................... 122
ISOGEN Batch .................................................................................................................................... 123
Extract batch ISOGEN files .......................................................................................................... 123
ISOGEN Supplemental ....................................................................................................................... 123
Stop Sign ............................................................................................................................................. 124
ISOGEN Start Point ............................................................................................................................ 125
Offset Tap ........................................................................................................................................... 125
Place an offset tap ........................................................................................................................ 128
PCF Out .............................................................................................................................................. 128
Extract piping component files ..................................................................................................... 129
PCF In ................................................................................................................................................. 129
Tap ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
Place a tap .................................................................................................................................... 130
ISOGEN Project Manager / I-Configure .............................................................................................. 130
ISOGEN Information ........................................................................................................................... 130
Material List Definition .................................................................................................................. 130
SKEY Information ......................................................................................................................... 131
End Type Information ................................................................................................................... 140
OrthoGen Panel ....................................................................................................................................... 143
OrthoGen Launch ............................................................................................................................... 143
OrthoGen Out...................................................................................................................................... 143
LNum Panel .............................................................................................................................................. 145
Setup ................................................................................................................................................... 146
Line Numbering System Dialog Box ............................................................................................. 146
Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 147
Set line numbers based on a P&ID project .................................................................................. 148
Set line numbers based on the current drawing ........................................................................... 148
Set line numbers based on a component ..................................................................................... 148
Count ................................................................................................................................................... 148
Set the line count value ................................................................................................................ 149
Increment ............................................................................................................................................ 149
Decrement........................................................................................................................................... 149
Assign ................................................................................................................................................. 149
Assign line numbers ..................................................................................................................... 150
Annotate .............................................................................................................................................. 150
Label components with line numbers ........................................................................................... 150
Line ..................................................................................................................................................... 151
Set the current line number to that of a component ..................................................................... 151
Line Isolate .......................................................................................................................................... 151
Pipe BOM / DB Panel ............................................................................................................................... 153
Bill of Material Setup ........................................................................................................................... 154
Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 155
Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 156
Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 156
Contents
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 156
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ................................................................................ 157
Cut Pipe Bill of Material ....................................................................................................................... 157
Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 158
Cut BOM using Manual placement............................................................................................... 159
Total Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 159
Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 160
Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 160
Single Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 160
Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 161
Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 162
Export Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 162
Import Pipe Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 163
Delete Bill of Material .......................................................................................................................... 163
Tag Toggle Bill of Material .................................................................................................................. 163
Tag Location ....................................................................................................................................... 163
Insert Tag ............................................................................................................................................ 164
Setup Live Database ........................................................................................................................... 164
Enter User Name and Password Dialog Box ............................................................................... 165
Export Pipe.......................................................................................................................................... 165
Select Item Dialog Box ................................................................................................................. 166
Import Pipe .......................................................................................................................................... 168
Audit Pipe Database ........................................................................................................................... 168
Synchronize Pipe Database................................................................................................................ 169
C.G. Generator.................................................................................................................................... 171
Misc Panel ................................................................................................................................................ 173
Auto Connect ...................................................................................................................................... 174
Group On/Off....................................................................................................................................... 175
Weld Size ............................................................................................................................................ 175
Specify the weld dot size for a single line pipe ............................................................................. 175
Join Pipe ............................................................................................................................................. 175
Join by Run ................................................................................................................................... 176
Join by Segment ........................................................................................................................... 176
User Shapes ....................................................................................................................................... 176
Create a user shape file ............................................................................................................... 180
Edit an existing user shape .......................................................................................................... 181
Create a user shape from points .................................................................................................. 186
Create a user shape from a polyline ............................................................................................ 188
Create a user shape from a block ................................................................................................ 189
Create a 3D user shape ............................................................................................................... 191
Create a 2D user shape ............................................................................................................... 193
Create a 2D single line user shape .............................................................................................. 194
Add a user shape to a specification ............................................................................................. 196
Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing ........................................................................... 197
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing ..................................................................... 197
Top Works Add ................................................................................................................................... 197
Top Works Change ............................................................................................................................. 198
System Out ......................................................................................................................................... 198
Generate a CAESAR II input file .................................................................................................. 198
Break Pipe........................................................................................................................................... 200
Break by Length ........................................................................................................................... 200
Break by Number.......................................................................................................................... 200
Contents
Nozzle Generic Attach ........................................................................................................................ 200
Place a nozzle generic attachment .............................................................................................. 201
Route from a generic nozzle ........................................................................................................ 202
Change position and direction of generic nozzle ......................................................................... 202
Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 202
Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 204
Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and the Center of Gravity Location.................................. 205
System In ............................................................................................................................................ 206
Read a CAESAR II input file ......................................................................................................... 207
Change Elevation ................................................................................................................................ 207
Change elevation by entering the elevation value ....................................................................... 207
Change elevation by Pick ............................................................................................................. 208
Change elevation by BOP ............................................................................................................ 208
Change elevation by TOP ............................................................................................................ 208
Dim Adjustment ................................................................................................................................... 208
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe ............................................................................................. 209
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension .................................................................................. 209
Elbow Centerline ................................................................................................................................. 209
ISO Flag .............................................................................................................................................. 210
Re-associate the Components............................................................................................................ 210
System Visibility .................................................................................................................................. 210
2D Panel.................................................................................................................................................... 211
2D Representation .............................................................................................................................. 211
Create a 2D representation .......................................................................................................... 212
2D Representation Hidden .................................................................................................................. 212
Create a 2D representation with hidden lines .............................................................................. 212
Box ...................................................................................................................................................... 212
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 213
Zoom Lock .......................................................................................................................................... 214
Turn on the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 214
Turn off the zoom lock .................................................................................................................. 214
Zoom Factors ...................................................................................................................................... 214
Bolt ............................................................................................................................................................ 215
Auto Gasket ........................................................................................................................................ 215
Place a gasket automatically ........................................................................................................ 216
Place a gasket manually............................................................................................................... 216
Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 216
Place stud bolts automatically ...................................................................................................... 216
Place stud bolts manually ............................................................................................................. 217
Auto Weld............................................................................................................................................ 217
Place weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 217
Place weld gaps manually ............................................................................................................ 218
Weld Total ........................................................................................................................................... 218
Count weld gaps automatically ..................................................................................................... 219
Standard .............................................................................................................................................. 219
Place standard stud bolts ............................................................................................................. 219
Non Standard ...................................................................................................................................... 219
Place nonstandard stud bolts ....................................................................................................... 220
Contents
RT Panel ................................................................................................................................................... 221
Auto Route .......................................................................................................................................... 221
Start a new route .......................................................................................................................... 223
Continue Routing .......................................................................................................................... 223
Route skewed pipe ....................................................................................................................... 224
Moveline ....................................................................................................................................... 225
Router ................................................................................................................................................. 225
Router commands ............................................................................................................................... 226
Buttweld LR .................................................................................................................................. 227
Buttweld SR .................................................................................................................................. 227
Threaded ...................................................................................................................................... 228
Socket Weld ................................................................................................................................. 228
Dimension Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 229
Automatic ............................................................................................................................................ 230
Place automatic dimensions ......................................................................................................... 230
Horizontal ............................................................................................................................................ 230
Place horizontal dimensions ......................................................................................................... 230
Vertical ................................................................................................................................................ 231
Place vertical dimensions ............................................................................................................. 231
Set ....................................................................................................................................................... 231
Set the Elevation .......................................................................................................................... 231
Rotated ................................................................................................................................................ 232
Place rotated dimensions ............................................................................................................. 232
Horizontal with Tail .............................................................................................................................. 232
Place horizontal tailed dimensions ............................................................................................... 232
Vertical with Tail .................................................................................................................................. 233
Place vertical tailed dimensions ................................................................................................... 233
Change ................................................................................................................................................ 233
Change the Elevation ................................................................................................................... 233
Component.......................................................................................................................................... 234
Place component annotation ........................................................................................................ 234
Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 234
Place component elevation annotation ........................................................................................ 235
Coordinates ......................................................................................................................................... 235
Place coordinates ......................................................................................................................... 235
Tick Mark ............................................................................................................................................. 236
Place tick marks ........................................................................................................................... 236
ISO Text .............................................................................................................................................. 236
Height .................................................................................................................................................. 236
Graphics / Pipe Ends............................................................................................................................... 237
System Prompts .................................................................................................................................. 239
Section ................................................................................................................................................ 240
Place a section graphic ................................................................................................................ 241
Detail ................................................................................................................................................... 242
Place a detail graphic ................................................................................................................... 242
Plan ..................................................................................................................................................... 243
Place a plan graphic ..................................................................................................................... 243
Instrument ........................................................................................................................................... 244
Place an instrument graphic ......................................................................................................... 244
10
Contents
Elevation ............................................................................................................................................. 245
Place an elevation graphic ........................................................................................................... 245
Arrow ................................................................................................................................................... 246
Place an arrow head graphic ........................................................................................................ 246
Weld .................................................................................................................................................... 247
Place a weld symbol graphic ........................................................................................................ 248
ISO ...................................................................................................................................................... 248
Place an isometric symbol graphic ............................................................................................... 250
Dots ..................................................................................................................................................... 250
Place a weld dot graphic .............................................................................................................. 251
Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 251
Place a miscellaneous graphic ..................................................................................................... 252
Flange O.D. ......................................................................................................................................... 253
Insert a flange O.D. ...................................................................................................................... 253
Plain End ............................................................................................................................................. 253
Insert a plain end .......................................................................................................................... 253
Hidden End ......................................................................................................................................... 253
Insert a hidden end ....................................................................................................................... 254
Pipe End .............................................................................................................................................. 254
Insert a pipe end ........................................................................................................................... 254
Layers Panel ............................................................................................................................................ 255
Change Layer...................................................................................................................................... 256
Change the layer associated with an object ................................................................................. 256
Set Layer ............................................................................................................................................. 256
Set the active layer ....................................................................................................................... 256
Delete Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 256
Delete a layer ............................................................................................................................... 257
Layer Off ............................................................................................................................................. 257
Turn off a layer ............................................................................................................................. 257
Layer On ............................................................................................................................................. 257
Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer Off command .............................................................. 257
Match Layer ........................................................................................................................................ 257
Match an object's layer ................................................................................................................. 257
Isolate Layer........................................................................................................................................ 258
Display only the layer associated with an object .......................................................................... 258
Un-Isolate Layer .................................................................................................................................. 258
Turn on all layers .......................................................................................................................... 258
Previous .............................................................................................................................................. 258
Restraints Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 259
Reinforcing Pad................................................................................................................................... 260
Insert a reinforcement pad ........................................................................................................... 260
Reinforcing Saddle .............................................................................................................................. 260
Insert a reinforcement saddle ....................................................................................................... 261
Translational........................................................................................................................................ 261
Place a translational restraint ....................................................................................................... 261
Anchor ................................................................................................................................................. 262
Place an anchor............................................................................................................................ 262
Spring Hanger ..................................................................................................................................... 262
Place a spring hanger................................................................................................................... 262
Rotational ............................................................................................................................................ 263
Place a rotational restraint ............................................................................................................ 263
11
Contents
Snubber ............................................................................................................................................... 263
Place a snubber............................................................................................................................ 263
Guide ................................................................................................................................................... 264
Place a guide ................................................................................................................................ 264
UCS Panel................................................................................................................................................. 265
Point and Shoot UCS .......................................................................................................................... 265
Flat ...................................................................................................................................................... 267
UCS Next ............................................................................................................................................ 268
Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 268
North ................................................................................................................................................... 268
South ................................................................................................................................................... 269
West .................................................................................................................................................... 269
East ..................................................................................................................................................... 270
UCS Object ......................................................................................................................................... 270
Steel Shapes Panel .................................................................................................................................. 271
Shapes ................................................................................................................................................ 271
Wide Flange Shapes .................................................................................................................... 274
Channel Shapes ........................................................................................................................... 275
Angle Shapes ............................................................................................................................... 276
Tee Shapes .................................................................................................................................. 277
Pipe Shapes ................................................................................................................................. 278
Tube Shapes ................................................................................................................................ 279
Flat Bar Shapes ............................................................................................................................ 280
Round Bar Shapes ....................................................................................................................... 281
Channel Shape with Lip................................................................................................................ 282
Angle Shape with Lip .................................................................................................................... 283
Z Shapes ...................................................................................................................................... 284
Angle Double Shape..................................................................................................................... 285
Steel Draw Panel ...................................................................................................................................... 287
Plate .................................................................................................................................................... 288
Place plate by points .................................................................................................................... 289
Place plate by closed polyline ...................................................................................................... 289
Place plate by curves ................................................................................................................... 290
Base Plate ........................................................................................................................................... 290
Place a base plate ........................................................................................................................ 292
Place a base plate with holes ....................................................................................................... 292
Steel Bolts ........................................................................................................................................... 292
Set Size by Component ...................................................................................................................... 295
Steel - Generic Attachment ................................................................................................................. 295
User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 296
Loft ...................................................................................................................................................... 299
Single Line Steel ................................................................................................................................. 300
Steel - Frame Creation ........................................................................................................................ 306
Create a new frame configuration ................................................................................................ 307
Edit a frame configuration ............................................................................................................ 308
Place a frame in the drawing ........................................................................................................ 308
Frame Annotation................................................................................................................................ 308
Ladder ................................................................................................................................................. 309
Place a ladder interactively .......................................................................................................... 311
Place a ladder using key-ins ........................................................................................................ 311
12
Contents
Place a ladder with a cage ........................................................................................................... 311
Handrail ............................................................................................................................................... 312
Place hand rail by points .............................................................................................................. 313
Place hand rail by polyline ............................................................................................................ 313
Stair ..................................................................................................................................................... 313
Steel Edit Panel ........................................................................................................................................ 317
Steel - Cope ........................................................................................................................................ 318
Miter .................................................................................................................................................... 318
Cut ....................................................................................................................................................... 319
Cut members by line..................................................................................................................... 319
Cut members by three-point plane ............................................................................................... 319
Union ................................................................................................................................................... 320
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 320
Global Edit........................................................................................................................................... 325
Global Edit All...................................................................................................................................... 325
Annotate Component .......................................................................................................................... 328
Convert Solid....................................................................................................................................... 328
Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 328
Select Control...................................................................................................................................... 329
Auto Cope ........................................................................................................................................... 329
Steel BOM / DB Panel .............................................................................................................................. 331
Steel BOM Setup ................................................................................................................................ 332
Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 333
Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 333
Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 333
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 333
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box ....................................................................... 334
Cut Steel Bill of Material ...................................................................................................................... 334
Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 335
Cut BOM using Manual placement............................................................................................... 336
Total Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................... 336
Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 337
Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 337
Single Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 338
Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 339
Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 339
Export Steel Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 339
Setup Live Database Steel ................................................................................................................. 340
Export Steel......................................................................................................................................... 341
Import Steel ......................................................................................................................................... 342
Audit Steel Database .......................................................................................................................... 342
Synchronize Steel Database............................................................................................................... 343
Export Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 343
Import Steel Model .............................................................................................................................. 344
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel ................................................................................................................ 345
HVAC .................................................................................................................................................. 346
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing............................................................................................. 348
Modify an HVAC shape ................................................................................................................ 348
HVAC Shapes Catalog ....................................................................................................................... 348
13
Contents
Place an HVAC shape from the catalog ....................................................................................... 351
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog ..................................................................................... 351
User Shape ......................................................................................................................................... 351
Place a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................... 354
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape ............................................................................................. 354
Generic Attach .................................................................................................................................... 354
Place a generic attachment in the drawing .................................................................................. 355
Edit ...................................................................................................................................................... 356
GC Edit ................................................................................................................................................ 356
Edit HVAC components globally .................................................................................................. 357
HVAC BOM Setup............................................................................................................................... 357
Add or remove properties from BOM ........................................................................................... 358
Change the column order ............................................................................................................. 359
Change text alignment in columns ............................................................................................... 359
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation ................................................................................ 359
Cut HVAC Bill of Material .................................................................................................................... 360
Cut BOM using Automatic placement .......................................................................................... 361
Cut BOM using Manual placement............................................................................................... 361
Total HVAC Bill of Material ................................................................................................................. 361
Total BOM using Automatic placement ........................................................................................ 362
Total BOM using Manual placement ............................................................................................ 362
Single HVAC Bill of Material ............................................................................................................... 363
Single BOM using Automatic placement ...................................................................................... 364
Single BOM using Manual placement .......................................................................................... 364
Data Remove ...................................................................................................................................... 364
Remove CADWorx data from components .................................................................................. 364
Layer Change...................................................................................................................................... 364
Change the layers associated with HVAC components ............................................................... 365
DB Generate ....................................................................................................................................... 365
Export CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 366
DB In ................................................................................................................................................... 366
Import CADWorx HVAC data ....................................................................................................... 366
Audit HVAC Database ........................................................................................................................ 366
Audit the HVAC database ............................................................................................................ 367
Synchronize HVAC Database ............................................................................................................. 367
Synchronize the HVAC database ................................................................................................. 367
Toolbars.................................................................................................................................................... 369
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars.................................................................................................. 369
Aliases and Command Names ........................................................................................................... 370
Connecting to components ................................................................................................................. 370
Compass ............................................................................................................................................. 370
Plane versus Isometrics view modes .................................................................................................. 370
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling ....................................................................................................... 370
Buttweld .............................................................................................................................................. 371
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 375
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 390
Flanges ............................................................................................................................................... 402
Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................................ 403
Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................................. 404
Blind Flange .................................................................................................................................. 406
Socket Type Flange...................................................................................................................... 406
Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................................... 408
14
Contents
Lap Joint Flange ........................................................................................................................... 409
Stub End ....................................................................................................................................... 409
Long Weld Neck ........................................................................................................................... 410
Reducing Slip-on Flange .............................................................................................................. 410
Reducing Threaded Flange .......................................................................................................... 412
Reducing Weld Neck Flange ........................................................................................................ 413
Flgd/BW Valves................................................................................................................................... 415
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 417
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 425
Lined ................................................................................................................................................... 428
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 431
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 433
Fiberglass ............................................................................................................................................ 434
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 437
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 445
Sanitary ............................................................................................................................................... 452
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 459
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 474
Victaulic ............................................................................................................................................... 486
Threaded/Socket ................................................................................................................................. 491
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 496
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 511
Thrd/SW Valves .................................................................................................................................. 524
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 526
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 535
Gaskets, Etc. ....................................................................................................................................... 538
Gasket .......................................................................................................................................... 538
Weld Gap ...................................................................................................................................... 539
Pipe Ends ............................................................................................................................................ 540
Restraints ............................................................................................................................................ 540
Misc ..................................................................................................................................................... 541
Modeling in 3D .............................................................................................................................. 543
Modeling in 2D .............................................................................................................................. 546
Operators ............................................................................................................................................ 548
Line Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 548
UCS ..................................................................................................................................................... 549
Steel .................................................................................................................................................... 549
Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 551
Palettes ............................................................................................................................................... 553
Specification and Data Files ................................................................................................................... 555
Editing Component Data Files ............................................................................................................ 555
AutoCAD Workflows Used With Plant ................................................................................................... 557
Modifying a User Profile ...................................................................................................................... 557
Creating a Base Profile ....................................................................................................................... 558
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV Fabricator with CADWorx Plant .............................................. 558
Special Monitored Commands Used With a Live Database ............................................................... 560
Update History ......................................................................................................................................... 561
Index ......................................................................................................................................................... 565
15
Contents
16
Preface
This document provides command reference information and workflows for CADWorx Plant.
We welcome comments or suggestions about this documentation. You can send us an email at:
PPMdoc@intergraph.com.
Documentation updates for supported software versions are available from
https://smartsupport.intergraph.com (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).
Intergraph gives you permission to print as many copies of this document as needed for noncommercial use at your company. You cannot print this document for resale or redistribution
outside your company.
Conventions
Before reviewing this guide, it is important to understand the terms and conventions used in the
documentation.
Use the information below to identify the convention and the type of information.
Convention
Type of Information
[Product Folder]
[AutoCAD Folder]
[CD-DRIVE]
Command Line
User Responses
Commands
Options
CAPITALS
Key + Key
Key combinations for which you must press and hold down one
key and then press another, for example, CTRL+P or ALT+F4.
17
Preface
Technical Support
For the latest information on CADWorx Plant, visit Intergraph CADWorx and Analysis Solutions
(http://www.coade.com/).
For current on-line support information, including knowledge base, technical tips, and
downloads, visit Intergraph Smart Support (https://smartsupport.intergraph.com).
You can contact Intergraph CAS Technical Support or Sales:
Fax: 281-890-3301
In order to provide technical support, Intergraph CAS needs to know what version of CADWorx,
AutoCAD, and Windows you are using. To determine this information, follow the steps outlined
for the product you are using:
CADWorx Product
Steps
Equipment or PV Fabricator
Internet Publisher
Datasheets
In addition to the information above, the table below lists the additional files that are usually
required to assist Intergraph CAS in resolving your technical issues:
18
Preface
CADWorx Product
CADWorx ISOGEN
CADWorx Equipment
PV Fabricator
19
Preface
CADWorx Steel
CADWorx Datasheets
CADWorx Design Review or CADWorx Email the AutoCAD model drawing (DWG) files.
Design Create
If the model consists of several line numbers,
indicate in the email which line numbers you are
having issues with.
20
If you are attaching large or multiple files to your eCustomer log, use a compression utility
such as WinZIP.
If you cannot attach your drawing files, then try to duplicate the issue in a new drawing with
as few components as possible. If the issue can be duplicated in a new drawing, attach the
duplicate drawing to Intergraph CAS.
For hardware lock issues, first verify that you have an Intergraph CAS hardware lock.
CADWorx Plant Professional, CADWorx P&ID, CADWorx P&ID Professional, CADWorx
Plant Ductile Iron, and CADWorx Plant Sanitary use the Intergraph CAS hardware lock for
licensing. CADWorx Steel, CADWorx Steel Professional Plus do not use the Intergraph CAS
hardware lock for licensing. For more information about hardware locks, see CADWorx
Hardware Lock Identification in the CADWorx Installation Guide.
Preface
You can now turn updates on or off for Layer/color in the Apply Change Data Rule. For
more information, see Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 54).
You can now create threaded needle valves with male threaded by female threaded ends.
You can now route mitered elbows using the Miter Elbow Buttweld elbow type or from the
component List. Component List is explained in Auto Route (on page 221). For more
information, see Auto Route (on page 221) and Continue Routing (on page 223).
You can now insert a cross and a tee with reducers. The software bases the size of the
component on the connected branch of the other component. For more information, see
New and Edit Component Pane in the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide.
You can now create skewed piping. You must set a maximum angle for the skew with the
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle rule if you do not want the default 15 degree value. For
more information, see Auto Route (on page 221), Route skewed pipe (on page 224), and
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle (on page 55).
When setting up a user defined material list in the ISOGEN Configuration panel you can now
use the attribute name -80 to display the short description column with text wrapping when
running ISOGEN Out
. For more information, see Setup short description column for
material list with text wrapping (on page 121).
You can now generate isometric drawings for curved piping by setting the Threshold in
ISOGEN Configuration to greater than 0. Generate these drawings by creating an adjustable
bend, setting the ISOGEN Data dialog box SKEY to PB** (** designates a valid ISOGEN
end type), and then running ISOGEN Out
or ISOGEN Batch . For more information,
see ISOGEN Out (on page 118), ISOGEN Batch (on page 123), Adjustable Bend (on page
384), and Enable curved piping in Plant isometrics (on page 122).
You can now turn visibility of TAPs on or off in the system layer with the SYSVIS command.
For more information, see System Visibility (on page 210).
The software now allows descriptions of end types for swages. For more information on the
new end types included, see PipeDescriptionCat (on page 41).
You have more options when you use the CHANGESIZE command to change the size of a
tee. For more information, see Change Size (on page 61), Change tee sizes automatically
(on page 65), and Change tee sizes manually (on page 66).
You can now type a value in Default Value of the Custom Data tab in the CADWorx Spec
View palette to override the custom data from the Specification Editor. If you set up custom
data with the List option, you can select an item from the Default Value to apply it as an
override. For more information, see Spec View Palette (on page 88) and Custom Data Tab
(CADWorx Spec View Palette (on page 91).
21
Preface
You can select from a list of items when editing custom data in the Component Custom
Data dialog box accessed in the Component Edit dialog box. You can also do the same in
the Custom Data dialog box accessed in the Global CEdit dialog box. For more
information, see Component Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 78) and Custom Data Dialog
Box (on page 80).
You can now move and connect Socket and Threaded components to straight buttweld
components. The software automatically deletes all extra welds.
You can now copy the nozzle generic attachments with the applied data.
The software now includes the custom data fields in the MSSQL database.
You can now use SDBAUDIT to delete all components profiles from the database. For more
information, see Audit Steel Database (on page 342).
CADWorx now eliminates the gap that existed between the pipe supports and the pipe wall
allow for a correct ISOGEN Out.
You can now enable the Repeatability return report in the I-Configure ISOGEN
Configuration Panel. This feature was controlled by the RepeatFile option in the previous
version of I-Configure. Enabling the repeatability report defines start and split locations for
consecutive ISOGEN outputs. Set the ISOGENSetting variable to control the import of the
repeat file data. The number of sheets then adds to the ISOGEN Data dialog box. For more
information, see ISOGENSetting (on page 38), Enable the Repeatability return report (on
page 120), and ISOGEN Out (on page 118).
CADWorx now supports CAESAR II 2014. For more information, see CAESARIIVersion (on
page 36).
For information on releases before 2014, see Update History (on page 561).
Obsolete Commands
These commands are no longer available in CADWorx Plant.
22
AUTOISO
BREAKDIST
CLASSICCLASH
C2ISO
C2MULTI
C2TEXT
CONTINUITY
CONVERTCL
ELEV2PLAN
ENDBREAK
ENDFLG
ENDHIDDEN
ENDPIPE
ENDPLAIN
EXIST
GEARELEV
HEAD
INSERTMODE
INSULATION
ISOCFG
ISOOUT
LEVERELEV
LINEPIPE
MAIN
NODEPLACE
NORHTELEV
OFFSETCL
Preface
OPERPLAN
OSYELEV
PIPEIN
PIPEOUT
PUMP
RECT
RED
ROLLEDFLG
ROLLEDPLAIN
SETANGLE
SOUTHELEV
SPEC
SPECCHG
TANK
VESSEL
VESSELOD
WESTELEV
3DFOLLOW
Online Help
To access the CADWorx Plant Help, type MANUAL on the command line, and then press
ENTER. This help file includes the Plant book, the Spec Editor book, and the CADWorx Plant
Tutorial.
23
Preface
24
SECTION 1
Setup
Before you begin using CADWorx Plant, you need to set options and some basic configuration
tasks.
Your project administrator needs to review and update the catalog (.cat) and project
(.prj) file in the Spec Editor before modeling begins.
In This Section
Startup Defaults ............................................................................. 25
Support Directory ........................................................................... 25
MVSetup ........................................................................................ 25
Startup Defaults
When starting CADWorx Plant for the first time, you are prompted for the system of
measurement to use in the drawing. This dialog box only displays the first time you start
CADWorx. After that, the configuration file name and location is stored in the registry. The
following options are available:
Support Directory
Drawings in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder should not be opened with CADWorx
Plant. If a drawing is started in this folder, an error displays indicating that the software should
not be run from this location. This stops CADWorx from initializing or preparing the support
drawings. Directly open AutoCAD to modify these drawings.
To create a base profile, see Creating a Base Profile (on page 558).
MVSetup
Plant menu: Utility > MVSetup
Plant uses the MVSETUP.LSP file supplied by AutoCAD. The software also supplies a simplified
version of the MVSETUP.DFS file in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder. If this file is
deleted, the software recreates it.
The MVSETUP.DFS file can be modified to include additional title blocks. Plant uses these title
blocks with the Setup (on page 28) function. The MVSetup routine has options that allow you to
add and delete title blocks. Plant supplies its own title blocks for your convenience. Plant title
blocks have attributes attached for ease of labeling.
25
Setup
26
SECTION 2
Command Line
SETUP
SETSIZE, SETSPEC
SPECOPTION
COMP2SIZE
COMP2SPEC
COMP2SIZESPEC
CHANGESIZE
CHANGESPEC
GCEDIT
27
CONVERTISO
CONVERTDOUBLE
CONVERTSINGLE
Socket Weld - Sets the socket welded fitting mode for hubbased components. For more information, see Socket Weld
(on page 84).
CURRENT
XCEDIT
Spec Change Toggle - Turns the TAG value update on or off. SPECCHGTOGGLE
Setup
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Setup
Setting toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Setup
Command line: SETUP
Defines all CADWorx settings within the current drawing. This command displays the CADWorx
Plant Setup dialog box.
28
Current Drawing - Displays the current default values for Specification / Size. Sets the
Colors, Drawing Mode, Fitting Mode, and Routing Mode.
Specification / Size - Displays the current settings for the specification and size:
Main Size - Displays the main size set for the drawing.
Reduction Size - Displays the reduction size set for the drawing.
Compass - Sets the compass color. The compass can also be turned off here.
Dimension - Sets the dimensions color. The dimensions can also be turned off here.
29
You can convert the drawing to another mode. For more information, see Mode Convert
(on page 81).
Fitting Mode - Specifies the fitting mode for hub-based components. Select one of the
following:
Socket - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the socket welded
section of the specification.
Threaded - Dimensions and engagement properties are based on the threaded section
of the specification.
Routing Mode - Specifies the mode for routing pipe in the drawing.
Center - Specifies the component is routed using the center line to draw the
component.
BOP - Specifies the component is routed using the bottom of pipe to draw the
component.
TOP - Specifies the component is routed using the top of pipe to draw the component.
Left - Specifies the component is routed using the left of the pipe to draw the
component.
Right - Specifies the component is routed using the right of the pipe to draw the
component.
Configuration Settings - Sets the values for the configuration. For more information, see
Startup Variables (on page 31).
Specification / Size - Sets the specification and sizes of the drawing. Specification must be set
before sizes can be set. For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 46).
Configuration Layers - Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors
of the layers. Default layers are provided. You can add and delete layers. For more information,
see Configuration Layers (on page 47).
Piping Rules - Sets the piping rules in the drawing. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 49).
Convert Legacy Drawing - Enables you to convert a legacy drawing to 2013 components. For
more information, see Convert Legacy Drawing (on page 55).
Save As - Saves the current configuration.
Load - Loads a saved configuration.
Apply and Close - Accepts the settings and closes the dialog box. Settings are immediately
applied to the current drawing.
Cancel - Cancels the operation.
Help - Displays the CADWorx Plant Users Guide help file.
30
Configuration Settings
Specifies values for the selected configuration setting.
The default drawing template, Imperial.dwt (Metric.dwt for metric) is also stored in the
registry. Each time the software is started, the default template is used.
The drawing parameters are setup during installation for imperial or metric in the setup
profile. If you want to change the configuration setting to the drawing parameters, use the
SystemMeasure (on page 45) variable to change the drawing settings.
Configuration Settings - Displays variables to change. Change variable values in the text box
list. For more information, see Startup Variables (on page 31).
If the configuration settings permission is set to read-only, only the Cancel button is
available.
Startup Variables
Provides default drawing and component values. You can modify the variables in the
configuration setting as needed. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 31).
The most recent configuration settings are stored in the registry and are used the next time you
start Plant.
Topics
Drawing Prototype ......................................................................... 32
AlphaSizeControl ........................................................................... 32
AuditDataOnStartup....................................................................... 33
AutoDimensionBox ........................................................................ 33
BomBoltControl.............................................................................. 34
BomScheduleDirection .................................................................. 34
BomScheduleSpacing ................................................................... 34
BomTagGridFactor ........................................................................ 34
BomTagOptimize ........................................................................... 35
BomTagRadiusFactor .................................................................... 35
BomTagSpacingFactor .................................................................. 35
BoltRoundControl .......................................................................... 35
CADWorxMaterial .......................................................................... 35
CAESARIIMaterial ......................................................................... 36
CAESARIIMemory ......................................................................... 36
CAESARIITolerance ...................................................................... 36
CAESARIIVersion .......................................................................... 36
DataBaseCodesISOGEN .............................................................. 36
DimensionsExcludedSlope ............................................................ 37
DimensionsExistingISOGEN ......................................................... 37
ElbowCenterLine ........................................................................... 37
FittingWidth .................................................................................... 37
HVACLibraryDirectory ................................................................... 37
ISOGENDefaultStyle ..................................................................... 38
ISOGENSetting.............................................................................. 38
ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount ............................................ 38
LanguageFile ................................................................................. 38
LayerByLineNumber ...................................................................... 39
31
Drawing Prototype
Default value: English/Inch
Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric
Enables you to select a drawing environment type:
English/Inch - Uses the Imperial dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.
Metric/Inch - Uses the Metric dimensions with Imperial pipe sizes.
Metric/Metric - Uses the Metric dimensions with Metric pipe sizes.
AlphaSizeControl
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, or 10
Controls the number of decimal places used in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to zero places
no decimals in Alpha Size. Setting the variable to a value from 1 to 9 places 1 to 9 decimal
places in Alpha Size. Setting this variable to 10 suppresses trailing zeros in Alpha Size.
Example with a value of 0:
For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4 1/2" or 6" would be 6"
For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60
Example with a value of 3:
For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.500" or 6" would be 6.000"
For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50.000 or 60.3 would be 60.300
Example with a value of 10:
For Imperial pipe size: 4 1/2" would be 4.5" or 6" would be 6"
For Metric pipe size: 50 would be 50 or 60.3 would be 60.3
If you want decimals to display in Alpha Size in Imperial or Metric, the recommended
setting is 10.
32
See Also
AutoDimensionBox
Default value: No
Allowed values: No, Yes
Controls boxes around rolling offset automatic dimensions when using Automatic
to Yes, a box is drawn for the rolling offset.
For more information, see Automatic (on page 230).
. When set
33
0 - Places the quantity for a set in the pre-CADWorx 2002 format, such as:
QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = (8) Studs with nuts
1 - Places the quantity for total bolts, and strips the set number from the long description,
such as:
QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 3/4", LONG_DESC = Studs with nuts
2 - Places the quantity for a set, the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the
bolt diameter to the long description, such as:
QUANTITY = 4, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = (8) 3/4" Studs with nuts.
3 - Places the quantity for total bolts, strips the set number from the long description, places
the alpha size based on the flange size, and appends the bolt diameter to the long
description, such as:
QUANTITY = 32, ALPHA_SIZE = 12", LONG_DESC = 3/4" Studs with nuts
When this option is set to 1 or 3, the long description of the bolt must contain the number
of bolts in the set enclosed by parenthesis. The software uses the value in parenthesis as the
new quantity. The number is then automatically removed from the long description when
displayed in the material list.
BomScheduleDirection
Default value: Down
Allowed values: Down or Up
Specifies the direction of the bill of materials schedule.
Up - Places the bill of materials schedule in the upward direction, with the column headings
at the bottom.
Down - Places the bill of materials schedule in the downward direction, with the column
headings at the top.
BomScheduleSpacing
Default value: 0.25
Allowed values: Positive real
Controls the spacing on the bill of material schedule.
BomTagGridFactor
Default value: 1.0
Allowed values: Positive real
Controls the bill of material tag grid density on the drawing.
When BomTagOptimize (on page 35) is set to 2, set this variable to 0.5, 1.0, 2.0, or 3.0.
34
2 - The algorithm is on. Flange, bolt, and gasket tags are stacked.
BomTagRadiusFactor
Default value: 1.25
Allowed values: Positive real
Controls the radius of tag bubbles. Bubbles are sized using this factor multiplied by the
AutoCAD setvar TEXTSIZE.
BomTagSpacingFactor
Default value: 1.25
Allowed values: Positive real
Controls how far bill of materials bubbles are spaced from the model or components within the
drawing.
BoltRoundControl
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Specifies the rounding for bolt length calculations.
0 - No rounding is performed.
1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in Catalog.
CADWorxMaterial
Default value: No
Allowed values: No or Yes
Controls CADWorx material generation when using System In
System In (on page 206).
35
0 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the pipe
material defined in Spec Editor
. This does not apply if the component was originally
created in CAESAR II.
2 - Provides extended material database material types in CAESAR II based on the actual
component material long description in the specification.
When using CAESAR II version 3.23, only option 1 can be used.
CAESARIIMemory
Default value: 12.0
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the amount of computer RAM used when importing a large CAESAR II input model.
This variable is not required, but is helpful if the import is failing. The value is multiplied by
megabytes.
CAESARIITolerance
Default value: 0.001
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the tolerance for items that are not transferring correctly to CAESAR II. For example,
hangers placed on a skewed line sometimes fail and require a larger tolerance factor.
CAESARIIVersion
Default value: 2014
Allowed values: 2011, 2013, or 2014
Specifies the format of the CAESAR II (.c2) input file created by CADWorx. The value should
match the version of CAESAR II that you are using.
DataBaseCodesISOGEN
Default value: No
Allowed values: No or Yes
Specifies how CADWorx ISOGEN uses the DataBaseCodes system.
No - The DataBaseCodes system is not used. CADWorx Plant creates generic item code
combinations for each run of ISOGEN, starting at 1 for each run. Components with identical
long annotation and specification file names are given the same item-code combination.
If this option is set to Yes and a valid DataBaseCodes system is not established, bill
of material generation within ISOGEN is not correct.
36
DimensionsExistingISOGEN
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2
Controls ISOGEN isometric representation of existing components.
0 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are dimensioned.
1 - Existing components are exported with dotted lines and are not dimensioned.
2 - Existing components are exported with solid lines and are dimensioned.
Individual ISOGEN dimension settings override this setting. For more information, see
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 73).
ElbowCenterLine
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0 (off) or 1 (on)
Controls square elbow centerlines on elbow-type components. When set to 1, an additional
square centerline is drawn without drawing square elbow graphics. These lines appear in 2D
double line and Isometric modes only.
You can also control this variable by setting the Elbow Centerline in CADWorx Plant
menu: Utilities > Drawing Control > Elbow Centerline.
FittingWidth
Default value: 1.0
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the appearance of all flanged, socket welded, and threaded fittings. When set to 1.0,
the software draws fitting hubs or flange ODs at 100% of the width specified in their data file.
This variable is useful at a value of 0.7 when drawing socket weld and threaded type hub fittings
where the hubs overlap.
HVACLibraryDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\HVAC
Allowed values: Valid directory name
Defines the location of the data files folder used for HVAC components.
37
For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page 118) and ISOGEN Batch (on page 123).
When this variable is defined, ISOGEN Out
Style dialog box.
ISOGENSetting
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Controls import of ISOGEN repeat file data when running ISOGEN Out (on page 118) or
ISOGEN Batch (on page 123).
ISOGEN Repeat File has to be configured in the ISOGEN Project for the repeat file
import to be active.
ISOGENContinuationGraphicsCount
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Displays continuation graphics based on the following selections:
LanguageFile
Default value: English.dic
Allowed values: A valid and properly formatted language file
Specifies the language of all Plant dialog boxes and prompts. The specified file must be present
in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support folder for proper operation of Plant.
You must set the LanguageFile to the regional language when using a language-specific
specification. For example, if you have Chinese characters in your specification, set the
LanguageFile to Chinese_Simplified.dic. If you do not, System Out (on page 198) and
System In (on page 206) do not function correctly.
38
0
a. Solid:
i.
ii.
"_" is placed in front of the layer name: For example: 150 spec is on layer _150.
iii. The color of the solid is set according to the table below:
Component level
color PRJ
Same Color
Same Color
Same Color
Same Color
Same Color
Different Color
Same Color
Different Color
Same Color
Same Color
Different Color
Different Color
b. Center line
i.
The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration
Layers > Cl setting.
ii.
The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl
setting.
iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers >
Cl setting.
iv. Any changes to Setup > Layers > Centerline Settings changes the existing
centerlines in the DWG file.
1
a. Solid
i.
The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.
ii.
The color of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer
of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.
b. Centerline: Same implementation as Solid.
39
2
a. Solid:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
The layer name of the solid is based on the Line Number name.
The color of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing
solid in the DWG file.
b. Centerline:
i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration
Layers > Cl setting.
ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl
setting.
iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers >
Cl setting.
iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing
centerline in the DWG File.
3
a. Solid
i.
ii.
40
The layer name of the solid and center line is based on the Line Number name.
The color of the solid and center line has the same implementation for solid color as
LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in the table above.
iii. The line type of the solid and center line is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid and center line is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer
of an existing solid and center line in the DWG file.
b. Centerline: Same implementation as the Solid.
4
a. Solid:
i. The layer name for solid is based on the Line Number name.
ii. The color of the solid has the same implementation for solid color as
LayerByLineNumber = 0 setting shown in table above.
iii. The line type of the solid is based on the AutoCAD Layer settings.
iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing
solid in the DWG file.
b. Centerline:
i. The layer name of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration
Layers > Cl setting.
ii. The color of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers > Cl
setting.
iii. The line type of the centerline is based on Plant > Setup > Configuration Layers >
Cl setting.
iv. Any changes made to the line number using CEDIT do not change the layer the
solid is on. Use the AutoCAD Layer command to change the layer of an existing
centerline in the DWG file.
1 - Size, spec, and count number are used for the line number
LineViewIsolationSettingsFile
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\[user-defined folder]
Allowed values: Valid file path (*.lvi)
Provides the location of the Isolation Settings File.
Sets the filter settings default file. When using the Line View Isolation Properties Manager,
the Isolation Setting File uses the file associated with the LineViewIsolationSettingsFile
variable and opens it as the default file. For more information on the Line View Isolation
Properties Manager, see Line View Isolation Properties Manager (on page 93).
PipeDescriptionCat
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0 through 6
Specifies the addition of end types to the long description, DataBaseCodes, and end prep for:
For end prep to show, you must have the end prep schema set in the description formats.
For more information, see Description Format Dialog Boxes, and Long, Short, Tag, and Part
Number Dialog Boxes in the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide.
Swage components when using the Swage reducer from CADWorx Spec View palette.
. For more
41
PipeSupportSetting
Default value: 1
Allowed values: 0, 1, or 2
Specifies the layer for pipe support component placement.
0 - The pipe support is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.
1 - The pipe support is placed on the same layer as the connecting pipe or elbow
component.
2 - The pipe support is placed on a new layer. The layer name is derived by appending the
component layer name and the pipe support layer name. For example, if the pipe solid is on
layer _150, and the pipe support layer name is SUPT, then the pipe support is on new layer
_150SUPT.
SaveLastProfileUsed
Default value: No
Allowed values: No or Yes
Specifies whether CADWorx saves the last profile used on exit.
When a drawing file is double-clicked in Windows Explorer, or if AutoCAD is started using an
icon without specifying any profile, AutoCAD always loads the last profile used.
No - Prevents CADWorx from saving the last profile used.
Yes - Allows CADWorx to save the last profile used.
SingleLineWidth
Default value: 0.02
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the default width for a single line pipe.
SpecificationDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec
Allowed values: Valid folder
Provides the location of the specifications folder.
This folder can be set as read-only.
42
SpecSizeOverride
Default value: Yes
Allowed values: No or Yes
Controls the ability to override component specification and size. If override is turned off, you are
not able to draw out of spec or out of size.
Yes - Overrides the specification and size limits.
No - Limits drawing to values within specification and size limits.
SteelCopeBoltDistance
Default value: 0.5 (Imperial) 15 (Metric)
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the bolted method of Cope
. For more information, see Steel - Cope (on page 318).
SteelCopeWeldDistance
Default value: 0.0
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the distance used when two steel beams are coped using the welded method of Cope
. For more information, see Steel - Cope (on page 318).
SteelLibraryDirectory
Default value: [Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_I ([Product Folder]\Plant\Steel_M for metric)
Allowed values: Valid folder name
Locates the data file used for drawing Steel. The data files can be located anywhere on the
computer, local network, or wide area network.
This folder can be set as read-only.
SteelNeutralAxis
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Specifies the location of centerlines for steel channels and angles.
0 - The centerline is drawn at the X--column value specified in the channel or angle data
files.
1 - The centerline is drawn at the midpoint of the flange.
2 - The centerline is drawn on the inside of the flange. Use this value if channels and angles
are coped with other members.
3 - The centerline is drawn on the outside of the flange. Use this value if channels and
angles are mitered with other members.
43
SteelRoundControl
Default value: 0
Allowed values: 0, 1, 2, or 3
Specifies the rounding of values read from the steel data files.
0 - No rounding is performed.
1 - Rounds the value up to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit (on
page 44).
2 - Rounds the value down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in SteelRoundUnit
(on page 44).
3 - Rounds the value up or down to the nearest multiple of the value specified in
SteelRoundUnit (on page 44).
SteelRoundUnit
Default value: 0.125
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the rounding multiple of values read from the steel data files. This variable is used with
SteelRoundControl (on page 44).
SteelToolTipSetting
Default value: 4235
Allowed values: Positive integer
Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a steel component. Click
the ellipsis in the value box next to SteelToolTipSetting to open the Tool Tip Data Selection
dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then
displayed for those settings.
SyncOnStartUp
Default value: Turn Off Synchronize
Allowed values: Synchronize With Prompt, Synchronize Without Prompt, Synchronize With
Changes Review
Controls the synchronize option on opening a drawing with an external database:
Turn Off Synchronize - Turns off the synchronize option when a drawing is loaded into
AutoCAD.
Synchronize With Prompt - Asks if the software should synchronize the drawing with the
external database.
44
SystemMeasure
Default value: English/Inch
Allowed values: English/Inch, Metric/Inch, and Metric/Metric
Specifies the unit system:
English/Inch - Uses the imperial system with nominal inch input.
Metric/Inch - Uses the metric system with nominal inch input.
Metric/Metric - Uses the metric system with metric input.
TemplateDatabaseFile
Default value: Pipe.mdb
Allowed values: Valid Microsoft Access database file name
Specifies the database file that is used with a bill of material.
ToolTipSetting
Default value: 8405
Allowed values: Positive integer
Specifies the data displayed in a tooltip when the mouse hovers over a component. Click the
ellipsis next to ToolTipSetting in Configuration Settings to open the Tool Tip Data Selection
dialog box. Select the needed data to display, and click OK. The correct integer is then
displayed for those settings.
TopWorksSetting
Default value: 1
Allowed values: 0 through 4
Specifies the layers for top works component placement.
0 - Top works are not added to the valve even if a top works file is set in the specification
file.
1 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is combined with the valve solid to
create one solid.
2 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and
center line. The top works solid is placed on the same layer as the valve solid.
3 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and
center line. The top works solid is placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.
4 - Top works are added to the valve. The top works solid is grouped with the valve solid and
center line. The top works solid id placed on a layer set from the CADWorx layer settings.
The layer name is derived by appending the valve layer name and the top works layer name.
For example, when the valve is on layer _150, and the top works layer name is TOP, the top
works solid is on layer _150TOP.
45
WeldDotSize
Default value: 1.0
Allowed values: Positive real
Specifies the default weld dot size on single-line, butt-welded piping components.
WeldGapToDB
Default value: Yes
Allowed values: No or Yes
Sets automatic weld gaps to database on or off.
Yes - Weld gaps are shown in the Bill of Material schedule.
No - Weld gaps are not shown in the Bill of Material schedule.
46
CADWorx Plant specifications are delivered to the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder. The
projects and catalogs are broken down into folders by their units of measure. CADWorx
P&ID also provides specifications delivered to the [Product Folder]\P&ID\Spec folder. If Plant
and P&ID are used together, you should select specifications from a single folder. For more
information, see SpecificationDirectory (on page 42).
or type SETSPEC
Configuration Layers
Specifies drawing layers and the default names, line types, and colors of the layers. Default
layers are provided. You can add and delete layers.
The default layers are mandatory for use with Plant and cannot be deleted. See the tables
below.
Layer changes made in this dialog box affect the current drawing session similar to the
AutoCAD LAYER command.
The commands in this dialog box are inactive if the configuration settings permission is set
to read-only.
Layer Name - Specifies the layer name. The layer name can be anything that is allowed by
AutoCAD. Wild card characters and spaces are not allowed. Click Update to change the name.
New - Adds a new layer with a default name. New layers are created when the drawing is
initialized with Plant. Access this option by right-clicking in the layer name column.
Delete - Removes the selected layer from the list. You cannot delete default layers. Access this
option by right-clicking in the layer name column.
Linetype - Specifies the line type for the selected layer. Select a value in the Select Linetype
dialog box.
Line types are defined in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Support\Cfm.lin and [AutoCAD
Product Folder]\UserDataCache\Support\acad.lin files.
Color - Displays the Select Color dialog box for selecting the color of the layer.
47
Default Name
Layer1
System
Non-graphical components
Layer2
Border
Border drawing
Layer3
BOM
BOM graphics
Layer4
Cl
Layer5
Dim1
Dimensions
Layer6
Dim2
Dimensions
Layer7
Equip
Plant components
Layer8
Exist
Existing components
Layer9
Graph
Layer10
Steel
Steel components
Layer11
Text
Text annotations
Layer12
Viewl
Viewports
Layer13
Cl_Steel
Layer14
HVAC
HVAC components
Layer15
Cl_HVAC
Layer16
TopWorks
Layer17
Clash
Clash entity
Layer18
Supports
Pipe Support
Layer19
CADWorx1
Future use
Layer20
CADWorx2
Future use
(User Defined)
48
Layer#
Default Name
Layer1
System
Non-graphical components
Layer2
Border
Border drawing
Layer3
Major-1
Layer4
Major-2
Layer5
Minor-1
Layer6
Minor-2
Layer7
Inst-1
Instrument Lines 1
Default Name
Layer8
Inst-2
Instrument Lines 2
Layer9
Elec1
Electrical Lines 1
Layer10
Elec-2
Electrical Lines 2
Layer11
Equip
Plant
Layer12
Text
Text
Layer13
Graph
Graphics
Layer14
Exist
Existing
(User Defined)
If the Cl and Cl_Steel layers are frozen or turned off, some CADWorx commands might
not function because data is stored on the centerline that is on these layers.
Piping Rules
Sets the piping rules for the drawing. These rules govern how the drawing is affected for each
piece of pipe or component drawn. The options you select affect the responses you receive from
the system.
Topics
Apply Size Rule ............................................................................. 49
Apply Specification Rule ................................................................ 50
Apply End Type Rule ..................................................................... 50
Apply Pipe Length Rule ................................................................. 50
Apply Weld Insertion Rule ............................................................. 50
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule .......................................................... 51
Apply Bolt Insertion Rule ............................................................... 51
Apply Trimmed Elbow Rule ........................................................... 51
Apply Pipe Healing Rule ................................................................ 51
Apply Branch Table Rule ............................................................... 51
Apply Flange Insertion Rule .......................................................... 51
Apply Bolt Hole Orientation Rule ................................................... 52
Apply Pipe End Prep Rule ............................................................. 52
Apply Auto Coupling Rule .............................................................. 52
Apply Line Number Rule ................................................................ 53
Apply Change Data Rule ............................................................... 54
Apply O-let Minimum Spacing Rule ............................................... 55
Center Line .................................................................................... 55
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle ................................................. 55
49
50
51
The PipeDescriptionCat must be set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule
must be set to Automatic for the pipe end preparation descriptions to appear.
If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
Automatic the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.
If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
No the pipe end preparation description is not set and does not display.
If the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 1 through 6 and the Apply Pipe End Prep Rule is set to
Show Options you are only prompted to set the pipe end preparation when inserting single
pipe using the PIPW1 command. Selecting No does not set the pipe end preparation and
does not display a description. This is the case even with the PipeDescriptionCat set to 1
through 6. Selecting Yes displays the description unless the PipeDescriptionCat is set to 0.
52
System On (Dynamic
Size/Spec)
Always Inherit
Show Options
Always Inherit
Show Options
Always Inherit
Show Options
Show 2 options:
1. Exact copy of
header/parent line number.
For more information about Line Number System setup, see Line Numbering System Dialog
Box (on page 146).
53
See Also
Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 54)
54
Center Line
Default value: On
Allowed values: On, Off
Indicates whether the centerline of the components displays.
Off - Indicates the software does not convert the legacy drawing when it is opened.
Automatic - Specifies that the software automatically converts the drawing to smart
components when you open the drawing.
Show Options - Indicates that the software prompts you to convert the drawing to smart
components when you open the drawing.
Use new spec data - Specifies whether CADWorx data is pulled from the project file or the
legacy components when a conversion is completed.
Yes - Indicates the software pulls data from the project file during the conversion.
No - Indicates the software pulls data from the legacy component during conversion.
See Also
CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match Specifications dialog box (on page 56)
55
56
If you notice that a component does not convert to a smart component then the component
may not be listed in the specification that you have chosen.
The software alerts you with a message if you do not have any legacy data in the drawing.
You must convert an inch drawing to an inch specification and a metric drawing to a metric
specification.
57
Search Options
Tag - Finds the legacy components based on the tag. Click in the Tag box to display
components filtered by tag in the Components filtered by: Tag box. You can type data in this
box to filter for specific tags.
Code - Finds the legacy components based on the code. Click in the Code box to display
components filtered by code in the Components filtered by: Code box. You can type data in
this box to filter for specific codes.
Line number - Finds the legacy components based on the line number. Click in the Line
Number box to display components filtered by line number in the Components filtered by:
Line number box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific line numbers.
Short annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the short annotation. Click in the
Short annotation box to display components filtered by short annotation in the Components
filtered by: Short annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific short
annotations.
Long annotation - Finds the legacy components based on the long annotation. Click in the
Long annotation box to display components filtered by long annotation in the Components
filtered by: Long annotation box. You can type data in this box to filter for specific long
annotations.
Components filtered by: <Search Options type> - Displays the findings of the Search
Options. When the software detects a legacy component the information based on the search
option selected, displays in the box. The heading of the Components filtered by box is
dynamic and changes depending on the Search Options item you have selected. The heading
also displays the number of records for each item selected. Selecting a record displays a red
arrow indication the component containing the selected information in the drawing.
58
Optional Items
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Optional Items
Setting toolbar: Specification Option Toggle
Plant menu: Accessory > Specifications > Optional Items
Command line: SPECOPTION
Places a component on the drawing when the component type in the specification has an
optional component (such as when a 300 lb. orifice flange is in the 150 lb. specification).
Click the command to toggle between two methods:
1. The command line message is:
All components will be dialoged...
When a component type is selected, all components of that component type appear in the
Optional component dialog box. For more information, see Optional Component Dialog
Box (on page 59).
2. The command line message is:
Specification dialog turned off...
When a component type is selected, the default component is selected for placement on the
drawing. The Optional component dialog box does not appear unless the component size
is out of the specification range or the component is not allowed by the specification. You
can then select a component in the range. For more information, see Optional Component
Dialog Box (on page 59).
Using SpecSizeOverride
When the SpecSizeOverride (on page 43) variable is off, sizes are restricted to the specification
range. If the selected size is not within the range, OK and Default are not available.
If SpecSizeOverride is on, the dialog box appears if the component size is not in the range. You
can then select the needed component even when it is out of range.
59
Size in
specification?
Dialog box
appears?
SpecSizeOverride
variable status
Dialog box
behavior
Yes
Yes
No
Off = 0
Normal operation.
Yes
No
No
Off = 0
Error message.
Yes
No
No
On = 1
Yes
Yes
Yes
Off = 0
Yes
No
Yes
Off = 0
Yes
No
Yes
On = 1
No
n/a
No
Off = 0
Error message.
Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size
Setting toolbar: Size
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size
Command line: COMP2SIZE
Specifies the main and reduction size by selecting a component with the needed sizes.
Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You can optionally
reverse the main and reduction sizes.
Spec
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Spec
Setting toolbar: Spec
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Spec
Command line: COMP2SPEC
Specifies the current specification by selecting a component using the needed specification.
60
Size-Spec
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Size-Spec
Setting toolbar: Size-Spec
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Size-Spec
Command line: COMP2SIZESPEC
Specifies the main size, reduction size, and specification by selecting a component with the
needed values. Reduction size is not set if it has not been set on the selected component. You
can optionally reverse the main and reduction sizes.
All
Setting toolbar: All
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > All
Command line: COMP2ALL
Specifies the main size, reduction size, specification, and line number by selecting a component
with the needed values.
This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 41) variable to 2. This is the
same as having the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System
dialog box selected. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page
146).
Editor
Creates, views, and modifies specifications. For more information, see Spec Editor (on page
89).
Change Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Size
Command Line: CHANGESIZE
Changes the size of the selected components based on available sizes. Sizes are based on the
specification project you choose when initially setting up the drawing. This command has two
main functions Automatic or Manual.
Automatic - Automatically changes the entire component to the chosen size.
The Change Size command only changes the size of the line until it reaches a
reducer. The software provides two options to replace a reducer to match the size change. The
pipeline on the other side of the reducer maintains its size. The only way to change the size of
the pipeline on both sides of a reducer is to select the reducer itself.
Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen size.
When using the manual option, the software forces you to select reducers for
adjacent components that are not the same size. The manual option does not stop size changes
at any point based on another component. However, unless the line on the other side of a
reducer is selected it is not changed.
61
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes automatically (on page 63)
Change the size of a reducer and the pipes manually (on page 64)
Change the size of a model with branch connections automatically (on page 64)
If prompted select, the BOP, TOP, or Current after selecting the piping to keep the position.
The software continues to prompt you for selection of a component until you press ENTER
to finish.
The entire drawing changes its size.
62
63
64
If you select the branch, the software prompts you for the size of the branch. The
prompts you receive are then determined on the size you select for the branch and the
main.
If you do not select the branch, the prompts are determined by the size you select for
the main.
For instance, large versus small pipe, selecting the branch or not selecting the branch,
using Change current component or add Reducer at branch, each choice produces
a different outcome. However, the software produces the same result of changing the
size of the tee component.
These options were designed so that you could change the tee as needed for any
scenario. For more information, see Change Size (on page 61).
6. Follow the prompts to select the best option for your model.
In most instances the following prompt displays.
The software displays the following prompt when a line is not going to change size
and requires a reducer. This happens when you select a tee and you do not select the lines
next to the tee. This can also happen when you select a tee and you do not select the
branch line of the tee. The software prompts for a reducer for any line that does not require
a size change.
65
If the software displays the prompt The model cannot change size, then there is an issue
with the model components. For instance, this can happen if you select a tee and the line
requires a reducer be inserted, but the pipe next to the tee is too short for the software to
accommodate the reducer. If this happens, check the lengths of the piping and make sure
there is room to accommodate the added components, and then run Change Size again.
If you select a single component and change to a small size, the software takes you
immediately to Step 7.
It is possible to receive the following prompt when changing the size of a tee. The software
provides a list of available components to change to if the size of the reducing tee does not
exist or if a component change is needed.
66
If the software displays the prompt The model cannot change size, then there is an issue
with the model components. For instance, this can happen if you select a tee and the line
requires a reducer to be inserted. However, the pipe next to the tee is too short for the
software to accommodate the reducer. If this happens, check the lengths of the piping and
make sure there is room to accommodate the added components, and then run Change
Size again.
If you select a single tee and change to a small size, the software takes you immediately to
step 6.
It is possible to receive the following prompt when changing the size of a tee. The software
provides a list of available components if the size of the reducing tee does not exist or if a
component change is needed.
67
Change Specification
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Change Spec
Command Line: CHANGESPEC
Changes the specification of the selected components. The software determines the change
specification based on the size and type of the selected component. The Change Spec
command has two modes either Automatic or Manual.
Automatic - Changes all the components on the selected line to the chosen specification
automatically, depending on the following conditions.
The Automatic option only changes the specification assigned to the system until it
reaches another specification.
If there is only one matching default component in the chosen specification, the software
chooses the default component.
If there are multiple default components matching the component in the chosen
specification, the software provides a list of all the default components.
If there is only one optional component matching the component in the chosen specification
and no matching default components, the software selects the optional component.
If there are multiple matching optional components in the chosen specification and no
matching default components, the software displays a list of optional components for you to
choose. When the list displays, the component highlights in the drawing.
If there are default and optional components of the same type, you must use the Manual
option to select an optional component.
Manual - Changes only the selected components to the chosen specification. If there is only one
matching component in the chosen specification, the software selects the default. If there is only
one optional component in the chosen specification and no default component, the software
selects the optional component. If there is more than one matching component in the chosen
specification, the software provides you a list of the components. The software changes any
component you select to the component information you select from the list. When the list
displays, the component highlights in the drawing.
Change the specification of a model with branches automatically (on page 70)
68
69
Local Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Local Edit
Setting toolbar: Component Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Local Edit
Command line: CEDIT
Modifies the properties of an existing component on the drawing. This command displays the
Component Edit dialog box.
70
If Setup
is used to create an external database, Synchronize
can be used to
change the specification in the database. For more information, see Setup Live Database
(on page 164) and Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 169).
If using a live database the Alpha Size, Short annotation, Long annotation, Line number,
Tag, Code, Weight, Sort sequence, and any Custom Data are updated when you click
Synchronize
. If you make a change in the database and the SyncOnStartUp (on page
44) is set to Synchronize With Changes Review, then the Synchronize Component
dialog box displays and enables you to review the changes to the database and reject or
accept the changes. For more information, see Synchronize Pipe Database (on page 169).
Coordinates
World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects
pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such
as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the
components are automatically updated along with the pipe length.
Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing
graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 210).
Miscellaneous
Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component
symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is
shown as dotted and dimensioned.
Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress
analysis information or insulation attached.
BOM Item Type
Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item.
Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item.
71
The selected item type appears on the bill of materials when the FLAG column is added
using Pipe BOM / DB > Setup . For ISOGEN, you must also sort by the FLAG column to
group by type. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 154) and BOM Sort
Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 157).
If Misc is selected when using ISOGEN, then ISOGEN treats the weld gap as a field-fit weld.
Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase the cut piece add-on allowances for field-fit
welds.
For more information on creating custom data, see New Field Dialog Box in the CADWorx
Spec Editor Users Guide.
Click the link for more information on the Component Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 78).
Modify a component
1. Click Local Edit
72
Symbol Information
Identifier - Specifies the identifier used by ISOGEN for the component. For more
information, see SKEY Information.
Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN Identifier used by CADWorx and uses
the value specified in Identifier.
SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the component. For more information, see
SKEY Information.
Overwrite - Overwrites the default value of ISOGEN SKEY used by CADWorx and uses the
value specified in SKEY.
Message - Specifies the message displayed with the component on the isometric drawing.
73
Graphic
None
No text or graphic
Unboxed
Text only
Square
Pointed
Round
Circle
Triangle
Diamond
Double Circle
Ellipse
Spindle / Flat / Support Direction - Specifies a valve spindle direction, an eccentric reducer flat
direction, or support direction.
Direction - Specifies the direction. Select North, South, East, West, Up, or Down.
ISOGEN option switch 80 (dimension to valve centers) is only available if the valve has a
spindle direction set.
Flow Arrow - Specifies how flow arrows are displayed for valves.
As drawn - Displays the flow arrow in the direction that the pipe was drawn.
Miter Pipe Export Options - Specifies how miter pipe is exported to ISOGEN.
74
Pipe with Welds - Exports each straight pipe run in the component as a linear pipe piece
with mitered ends and welded connections.
Pipe with Welds Example
Bend - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend.
Bend with Length - Exports all pipe segments in the component as a single miter bend.
The length of the component is also added to the Long Annotation of the component,
allowing two bends with different lengths to have separate marks in the bill of material.
75
Other
76
Spool - Specifies the spool identification. This value overrides the default spool value
created by ISOGEN. Type the required alpha or numeric character.
Sketch - Specifies a .dwg detailed sketch to display with the isometric drawing. For more
information on detailed sketches, see the Information Notes.pdf and Detailed Sketches.pdf
files in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils folder.
Sheet # - Specifies the sheet number of an ISOGEN drawing. Type the required alpha or
numeric character.
Mark - Specifies the mark number for a component. Type the required alpha or numeric
character.
Description
Default Condition
BS
Male
BW
Butt Weld
Unspecified
CL
Clamped
Male
CP
Compression
Female
FA
Flared
Male
FL
Flanged
Unspecified
GF
Gland
Female
GL
Glued
Female
LC
Liner (Clamped)
Male
LR
Liner (Reducing )
Male
LN
Liner (Nut)
Male
MP
Male
PF
Push Fit
Female
PL
Plain End
Male
SC
Screwed
Female
SW
Socket Weld
Female
Default
Male, Female, Unspecified, or None - Specifies the end condition of the selected condition
type. These options are only available when the end condition of the connection type can be
changed. For example, SC, SW, CP, GL, and PF allow either male or female end conditions.
Unspecified is used for welded and flanged end conditions.
77
Primary - Defines reference dimensions relative to the primary axes of the model.
SKEY - Specifies the SKEY used by ISOGEN for the reference dimensions. For more
information, see SKEY Information.
Start Point - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the start point. You can only edit Start
Point when editing user shapes.
Reference Point 1 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the first reference point.
Reference Point 2 - Displays X, Y, and Z coordinates for the second reference point.
78
Global Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Global Edit
Setting toolbar: Global Component Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Global Edit
Command line: GCEDIT
Modifies the properties of multiple components. This command displays the Global CEdit dialog
box.
79
80
Mode Convert
Mode convert commands change a piping component from one mode to another mode. The
existing component is deleted and replaced with a component in the new mode.
Many possibilities exist, such as:
2D double line to 3D solids
3D solids to 2D double line
2D single line to 2D double line
2D double line, flat to 2D double line, north
Converting to different planes
Rebuilding an existing component in the same mode or plane
The specification layer name determines the layer to delete and replace. This layer name is
prepended with an underscore, such as _150. Objects on other layers (without an underscore in
their names) are not changed.
You can convert from one plane to another by changing planes and converting the component
mode.
Example
The following tee was drawn once, copied to three other locations, then converted to different
planes.
Topics
Convert a component to a different mode ..................................... 82
3D Solids ....................................................................................... 82
Convert Isometric........................................................................... 82
2D Double Line .............................................................................. 82
2D Single Line ............................................................................... 82
Convert Existing............................................................................. 83
Convert to 3D enhanced ................................................................ 83
Convert from project data .............................................................. 83
Convert Intersected Piping ............................................................ 84
CWexplode .................................................................................... 84
81
, Convert Isometric
, 2D Double Line
, or 2D Single Line
3D Solids
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 3D Solids
Setting toolbar: Solids
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 3D Solids
Command line: CONVERTSOLID
Converts selected components to 3D solid mode.
Convert Isometric
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Convert Isometric
Setting toolbar: Isometric
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > Isometric
Command line: CONVERTISO
Converts selected components to isometric mode.
2D Double Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Double Line
Setting toolbar: Double Line
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Double Line
Command line: CONVERTDOUBLE
Converts selected components to 2D double line mode.
2D Single Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > 2D Single Line
Setting toolbar: Single Line
Plant menu: Accessory > Mode Convert > 2D Single Line
Command line: CONVERTSINGLE
Converts selected components to 2D single line mode.
82
Convert Existing
Command line: CONVERTEXISTING
Stops external data (xdata) from appearing in the bill of material or removes xdata from the
components. After xdata is prevented or removed, the component is moved to the EXIST layer.
You can also execute this command in Global Edit
or Local Edit
information, see Global Edit (on page 79) and Local Edit (on page 70).
. For more
If you use the CONVERTEXISTING command and you select Yes, you cannot change
the components back. To change components in the existing layer, back and forth, you must
select No when using this command.
1. Type CONVERTEXISTING on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select Yes to remove all data from the components.
OR
Select No to not remove all data.
You can also do this in the Global Edit
or Local Edit
dialog boxes.
Convert to 3D enhanced
Command line: CONVERTENHANCED
Converts the selected components to 3D enhanced mode.
1. Type CONVERTENHANCED on the command line, and the press ENTER.
2. Select the components you want to convert to 3D enhanced mode, and then press ENTER.
The components convert to 3D enhanced.
83
CWexplode
Command line: CWEXPLODE
Changes the CADWorx component to an AutoCAD 3D solid with xdata included.
1. Type CWEXPLODE on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Type S on the command line or E to select the entire drawing, and then press ENTER.
3. Select the component you want to change, and then press ENTER.
Step 3 does not apply if you selected the Entire Drawing option.
The components are converted to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata included.
Socket Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Socket Weld
Setting toolbar: Socket Weld
Specifies the socket welded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and
engagement properties are based on the socket welded section of the specification.
You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more
information, see Setup (on page 28).
Threaded
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Threaded
Setting toolbar: Threaded
Specifies the threaded fitting mode for hub-based components. Dimensions and engagement
properties are based on the threaded section of the specification.
You can also define the fitting mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup dialog box. For more
information, see Setup (on page 28).
84
Settings
CADWorx Plant I tab: Setup Size/Spec > Settings
Setting toolbar: Current Settings
Plant menu: Utility > Settings
Command line: CURRENT
Displays the current drawing settings, such as main and reduction sizes, text and dimension
sizes, line and drawing modes, and specifications. This command displays the Current
Settings dialog box.
Most of these settings are changed using Setup
page 28).
XREF Edit
Plant menu: Utility > Component Edit > Xref Edit
Command line: XCEDIT
Settings toolbar: Xref Edit
Views sizes or information within the component Xref. This command works in a similar fashion
to the CADWorx CEDIT functionality. For more information, see Local Edit (on page 70). This
function uses the same dialog box as Local Edit, but it does not allow you to modify any of the
values. If a modification to a component is required from within an Xref, use the AutoCAD
REFEDIT command to open that part of the Xref. Then use the Local Edit command to make
any modifications necessary. After the required modification is completed, close the Xref with
the REFCLOSE command.
85
86
SECTION 3
Palettes Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: Palette
Command Name
Command Line
LINEVIEW
PIPESUPPORTVIEW
Insulation View - Creates a data file in which you can add, INSULATIONVIEW
modify, and remove insulation configurations that can be
applied to CADWorx components. For more information,
see Insulation View Palette (on page 100).
Discontinuity View - Checks for different types of
modeling issues. For more information, see Discontinuity
View Palette (on page 104).
DISCONTINUITYVIEW
PIPESUPPORTREPORT
P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table PIDVIEW
in a project database. For more information, see P&ID View
Palette (on page 107).
Clash View - Runs interactive clash detection on AutoCAD CLASHVIEW
3D solids in the current drawing as well as any attached
XREF drawings. For more information, see Clash View
Palette (on page 111).
Assembly View - Creates an assembly for use in a
drawing. For more information, see Assembly View Palette
(on page 113).
ASSEMBLYVIEW
87
Palettes Panel
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 88)
Settings Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 90)
Custom Data Tab (CADWorx Spec View Palette) (on page 91)
88
Palettes Panel
Spec Editor
CADWorx Plant I Tab: Setup and Size/Spec Panel > Editor
Spec View Palette > Start Spec Editor
Command Line: SPECEDIT
Modifies the delivered specifications and creates new specifications.
Spec Editor
can also be used as standalone software and can be copied to any
computer. It does not require a hardware lock (ESL) or a license manager.
CADWorxSpecEditor.exe is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec Editor folder.
When opening the Spec Editor from CADWorx, the software loads the specification that you
have specified in Plant. If you want to open a different specification, then select the specific spec
in Project Data.
The Spec Editor stores all the components delivered with CADWorx. If you want to
add a size for a component, you must first add it in the Data Table and the EndType Table in
the Specification Editor. You cannot use a component size that has not been added to the
catalog for the specification. CADWorx uses the SpecificationDefaultProject (on page 43) to
locate the project file and access the components.
Optional components can be manipulated and created in the spec editor.
For more information, see the CADWorx Spec Editor User's Guide delivered with CADWorx.
89
Palettes Panel
90
Palettes Panel
Color Options
Main Size component - Specifies the color associated with main size components.
Main Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with main size optional
components.
Reducing Size component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size components.
Reducing Size optional component - Specifies the color associated with reducing size
optional components.
Level 1 category - Specifies the color associated with level 1 category components.
Level 2 category - Specifies the color associated with level 2 category components.
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 92)
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 93)
Line View Isolation Properties Manager (on page 93)
91
Palettes Panel
If components have been hidden using the Line Isolate tab, those components are not
listed in the Find tab.
For isolation of multiple field selections in the list of the Line View palette, the following logic
is being applied:
Refresh List - Refreshes the line number list in the palette. Use this option if new line
numbers do not appear in the list.
Show All Components - Makes all objects in the drawing visible.
Select Line Number by Component - Select a component in the drawing. The software
uses the line number of this component to isolate the model.
Isolate Based on Selection - Isolates the selected items in the list.
Invert Isolation - Isolates the reverse of the selected item in the list.
Set Layer Options - Displays the Line View Layer Selection dialog box so that you can
include or exclude certain layers when Isolate Type is set to Layer Isolate. For more
information, see Layers Dialog Box (on page 113). By default, all layers are visible for line
isolate.
Filter Settings Manager - Displays the Line View Isolation Properties Manager which
enables you to manage isolations in the drawing. For more information, see Line View Isolation
Properties Manager (on page 93).
Help - Displays on-line help.
Right-clicking the line number list displays the Isolate Selected Items, Invert Isolate
Selected Items, Show All Components, Set Layer Options, Refresh List, Sort Ascending,
and Sort Descending options.
Isolate Type
Full - Displays the selected CADWorx components, and hides all non-CADWorx components
such as buildings, equipment, and dimensions.
Partial - Displays the selected CADWorx components and all non-CADWorx components.
Layer - Displays the selected CADWorx components and hides all non-CADWorx components
based on the layer setup.
Filter - Enter a wildcard filter to limit the items available in the list. The filter is case sensitive.
For wildcard character details, see Select Item Dialog Box (on page 166).
92
Palettes Panel
Click New, type a name in the New Name dialog box, and then click OK.
93
Palettes Panel
Rename - Enables you to rename an Isolation Setting.
Save - Saves the new Isolation Setting you created for the management of this isolation.
Save As - Enables you to save an isolation setting file.
Select / deselect all - Enables you to select or clear all items in Selected Items.
94
Palettes Panel
Insert Options
Multiple - Inserts multiple supports onto the pipe. You specify the start point, end point, and
spacing between the supports. This option is only available for pipe supports.
Detect Steel - Detects CADWorx Steel components to set the correct size for the beam clamp if
the beam clamp is used as the last component in the pipe support assembly.
Repeat Insert - Repeats the insert command for pipe type supports.
Type INSERTSUPPORT on the command line to insert the last selected pipe support or
the start procedure of the last selected component.
Point - Enables you to change the distance from the selected component to another
component on the same linear pipe.
Pipe end point distance - Displays the distance measurement from the selected component to
the end of the pipe. Repeating the command changes the direction of the measurement to the
opposite end of the piping, where it connects to the next component.
95
Palettes Panel
96
Palettes Panel
97
Palettes Panel
98
Palettes Panel
Regenerate a pipe support in the drawing
1. Click Regenerate Pipe Support
display.
If prompted select, the BOP, TOP, or Current after selecting the piping to keep the position.
The software continues to prompt you for selection of a component until you press ENTER
to finish.
The entire drawing changes its size.
99
Palettes Panel
Model
Insulation
100
Palettes Panel
101
Palettes Panel
Insulation Options Dialog Box
Controls parameters for insulation options.
Insulation
Append "_I" to layer name - Adds the characters _I to the layer name to create the insulation
layer name. For example, if the solid is on layer 1"-150-CWS, the insulation solid is on 1"-150CWL_l. The insulation solid is grouped with the component solid and center line.
New Layer Name - Indicates that the software creates a new layer.
Name - Specifies the layer name for the insulation solids.
Color - Displays the standard AutoCAD color selection dialog box. Select the default layer color
for the insulation.
Graphics
Show Graphics for Gasket - Indicates whether gasket insulation graphics display. This works
only for enhanced mode.
Show Graphics for Weld gap - Indicates whether weld gap insulation graphics display. This
works only for enhanced mode.
Show Graphics for User Shapes - Indicates whether user shape insulation graphics display.
Metric/Inch Units system
Millimeter - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in millimeters in mixed metric units
(Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) situations.
Inch - Indicates that you can enter thicknesses in inches in mixed metric units (Imperial pipe
size / metric dimensions) situations.
102
Palettes Panel
Modify - Modifies existing insulation graphics and data.
Remove - Removes existing insulations graphics and data.
Refresh - Generates the graphics from the insulation data stored in the component's centerline.
Use this option if insulation graphics were deleted or lost.
Graphics
Add - Adds insulation graphics to components that have had their graphics removed. The data
previously stored in the components is used to generate the graphics.
Remove - Removes the graphics from the selected components. The insulation data remains.
These components do not show the insulation solid even if you later click Refresh.
Visibility
Isolate - Isolates insulation graphics by either selecting components on screen or by selecting
line numbers from the list.
Hide/Show - Hides or shows the insulation graphics by selecting components on screen or by
selecting line numbers from the list.
Show All - Shows all objects that have been previously hidden in the current drawing.
Report - Creates a complete report, in HTML format, about all of the insulation components in
the model. The report is itemized by the different types of insulation data and calculates the total
weight, volume, and length.
Filter - Filters the list of line numbers using wild cards. For example, type *25-1B* to limit the
line number list to line numbers with 25-1B as part of the name. The text filter occurs regardless
of where the text is in the line number name.
Edit - Displays the Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects dialog box so that you can edit
the insulation data for all components having the selected insulation configuration.
Right-Click Menu
In Line Number selection mode, a right-click menu is available with additional options. The rightclick menu changes what displays in the edit box.
Select All / Clear All - Selects or clears all line numbers in the list.
List Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only insulated line numbers.
List Un-Insulated Line Numbers - Lists only uninsulated line numbers.
List Data Only Line Numbers - Lists line numbers that have insulation data but no insulation
graphics.
List Un-Insulated Components - Lists only uninsulated components.
List All - Refreshes the list.
Modify - Replaces the selected insulation data with the highlighted insulation in the Available
Configuration grid. This change applies to all components in the selected line number.
Remove - Removes the insulation from all components in the selected line number.
103
Palettes Panel
Insulation Global Edit <number> Objects Dialog Box
Controls parameters for editing the insulation data on multiple objects. This dialog box applies
the settings to all of the selected objects.
Thickness - Displays the insulation thickness value. You cannot edit this value.
Density - Specifies the insulation density value. Type numeric values greater than zero. You
can also select an existing value. The density is used to calculate the insulation weight by
multiplying it with the insulation volume. This parameter is required to create an insulation
configuration.
In Imperial units (Imperial pipe size / Imperial dimensions), this value has units of lb / in3.
In mixed metric (Imperial pipe size / metric dimensions) the value has units of g / cm3.
In metric (metric pipe size / metric dimensions), the value has units of g / cm3.
104
Palettes Panel
Tolerance Min - Specifies the minimum connection tolerance. Two components that are
separated by a distance greater than the minimum tolerance, but less than the maximum
tolerance are considered disconnected.
Tolerance Max - Specifies the maximum connection tolerance. Two components that are
separated by a distance greater than the maximum tolerance are considered un-connected.
Color Arrow - Specifies the color for arrows.
Color Text - Specifies the color for text.
Auto Refresh - Indicates whether the software automatically updates the grid when you open
the drawing.
# - Displays a number from the palette that coincides with the highlighted number in the drawing.
The arrow and text color setting is used for the graphics drawn in the model.
Line Number - Displays the line number of the component.
Type - Displays the discontinuity type for the component.
Disconnected - Displays components that are not connected within the minimum tolerance.
Un-connected - Displays components that are not connected with in the maximum
tolerance.
Overlap - Displays components that are duplicated at the same location. The number in
parenthesis (n) is the number of overlapping components at this location.
Not on line - Displays components that are not connected to the pipe centerline (typically
OLET type components).
Gap - Displays the distance between the two components. This value is 0.0 for overlapping
components.
Long Description - Displays the long description of the component.
Category - Displays the category of the component.
Component Type - Displays the command named used to draw the component.
(X,Y,Z) - Displays the global X-, Y-, Z-coordinates of the component center point.
Pressing CTRL or SHIFT while left-clicking lets you select multiple items from the list.
105
Palettes Panel
Right-click to change the AutoCAD view to the location of the issue without zooming.
106
Palettes Panel
107
Palettes Panel
Size - Lists the size for the P&ID component.
Spec- Lists the spec for the P&ID component.
Drawing - Lists the drawing for the P&ID component.
Right-Click Menu
Insert in model - Reads the size, spec, and component type from the P&ID database and
inserts the component into the Plant model.
View P&ID drawing - Displays a preview of the P&ID drawing.
To zoom inside the viewer, use the two arrow buttons on the left side of the dialog box. Zooming
inside the viewer can also be done by holding down the left mouse button while rotating the
mouse scroll wheel. The viewer dialog box closes when you switch between drawings in the
same session of AutoCAD. The dialog box must be started with every new AutoCAD session.
Left-click an item to update the P&ID drawing viewer dialog box if it is active.
Double-click an item to run the Insert in model command.
Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.
Options - Displays the Options dialog box so that you can set the colors of the items displayed
in the P&ID and Plant data.
Plant Data
P&ID ID_Count - Displays the ID_COUNT of the P&ID component if a link between the P&ID
component and the Plant component is made. The Plant database (PIPE table) saves the P&ID
ID_COUNT in the RESERVE_10 column.
Line Number - Displays the line number of the plant component.
Tag - Displays the tag of the plant component.
Size - Displays the size of the plant component.
108
Palettes Panel
Spec - Displays the spec associated with the plant component.
Drawing - Displays the drawing associated with the plant component.
Description - Displays the description of the plant component.
Right-Click Menu
CEdit - Displays the appropriate Component Edit dialog box.
Zoom - Zooms and highlight the component in the model.
List data from all drawings - Lists plant data from all drawings that have the line number.
List data from current drawing - Lists plant data from the open drawing.
Refresh - Refreshes the P&ID Data and Plant Data lists.
Link components
1. Select the check box next to an item in the P&ID Data list and an item in the Plant Data list.
2. Click Link.
The P&ID ID_Count value in the Plant Data list updates.
Vales, reducers, and nozzles can be linked. Instrument components cannot be linked.
Unlink components
1. Select two linked components.
Link changes to Unlink.
2. Click Unlink.
The software removes the link between the two components.
109
Palettes Panel
When Insert Into DB is clicked, rows are added to the appropriate tables within the database.
Plant drawings created without a database have xdata attached to each component that allows
the software to automatically add rows into the appropriate tables.
110
Palettes Panel
You can set the color of the grid items using the Options dialog box. For more information,
see Options Dialog Box (on page 112).
Left-clicking an item in the list generates the clash entity in the model and zooms to the
clash.
111
Palettes Panel
Right-Click Menu
Clash Status New - Changes the status of a clash to New.
Clash Status Active - Changes the status of a clash to Active.
Clash Status Resolved - Changes the status of a clash to Resolved.
Clash Status Approved - Changes the status of a clash to Approved.
Clash Zoom To - Zooms to the clash point.
Clash Viewer - Displays a dialog box with the two clashing components.
Clash Isolate Selected - Isolates the selected clash.
Clash Isolate All - Creates clash entities for all clashes, and isolates them. To remove all clash
entities from the model, run the command CLASHDELETEALLOBJECTS.
Clash Show All - Shows all components in the drawing.
Do Not Report - The software does not notify you if a clash is detected.
Show Tray Notification - The software notifies you through the tray bubble notification that
a clash has occurred.
Show Palette - The software displays the Clash View palette every time a clash is
detected.
Ignore connected steel - Indicates whether the clash detection system checks for connecting
steel members. If this option is selected, steel members that are touching each other are
ignored.
Detect clashes within blocks - Indicates whether the software detects clashes inside blocks. If
this option is selected, the system detects clashes within any blocks in the current drawing.
Synchronize clashes from XREFs - Indicates whether the software checks for clash data
inside external reference drawings and updates the master drawing data for that clash. Only
New clashes in the master drawing which are from an XREF drawing have the status updated to
match the status that is saved in the XREF drawing.
Synchronize layers from XREFs - Indicates whether the system checks for clash layer data
inside externally reference drawings and updates the master drawing clash layer data to match.
If a layer in an XREF is excluded from clash detection, the XREF layer is also excluded in the
master drawing.
Ignore insulation clashes - The system ignores all clashes generated from components
created with the CADWorx Insulation View palette.
Connectivity tolerance - Specifies the tolerance for checking component connectivity. If two
components are connected, a clash is not reported, even if the actual solids intersect.
Clash zoom factor - Specifies the zoom factor used during clash.
Color Options - Specifies the color of the clash entity and the color of the list.
112
Palettes Panel
Command Line
MAKEASSEMBLY
INSERTASSEMBLY
ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS
Project File - Specifies the project file selected for the assembly.
Global File - Specifies the global assembly file associated with the assembly. Click Browse to
change the global assembly file.
113
Palettes Panel
Right- Click Menu
Insert Assembly - Inserts an assembly.
View Assembly - Opens the Assembly Viewer and displays the assembly. The assembly can
be zoomed and rotated for a 360-degree view.
a. Wireframe - Displays the model in wireframe view.
b. Hidden - Displays the model in hidden view.
c. Shaded - Displays the model with shaded view.
Modify Assembly - Enables you to edit an assembly.
New - Creates a new assembly.
Rename - Renames an assembly.
Delete - Deletes an assembly.
Copy - Copies an assembly.
Paste - Pastes an assembly.
Reload Global File - Reloads the global assembly file.
Edit File Paths - Edits the path folder location of the assembly.
You can close the Assembly Manager at anytime by typing ASSEMBLYCLOSE on the
command line.
Create an assembly
1. Click Assembly View
press ENTER.
2. Click Create Assembly
3. Select all the components necessary for the assembly, and press ENTER
4. Pick a point where you want to connect.
5. Type a name on the command line, and press ENTER.
The assembly appears in the Assembly Manager.
Edit an assembly
1. Click Assembly View
press ENTER.
114
Palettes Panel
4. Click OK to delete.
If you do not want to delete the object, click Cancel.
The assembly disappears from the Assembly Manager.
115
Palettes Panel
116
SECTION 4
ISOGEN Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN
Command Name
Command Line
ISOGENOUT
ISOGENBATCH
ISOGENSUPL
STOPSIGN
ISOGENSTARTPT
OTAP
TAP
117
ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Out
Command line: ISOGENOUT
Generates an isometric drawing. The components you select to use with this command must be
generated with an authorized ISOGEN hardware lock, or this function cannot process them. The
selection process has different options that allow you to perform more detailed selections.
You can resubmit ISOGEN drawings after you make changes to your CADWorx drawing.
The software displays the drawings in their previous isometric layout with the added
components. You must define the Repeatability return report in I-Configure for resubmitted
drawings to display. To set the ISOGEN repeatability feature, see Enable the Repeatability
return report (on page 120).
118
ISOGEN Panel
Enable the RepeatFile for I-Configure 2012
1. Open I-Configure, select an isometric drawing style, and then select the Detail tab.
2. Expand Supplementary in the list, and then select RepeatFile.
3. In the Property panel, set Enabled value to True.
Controls parameters for transposing the system by X, Y, and Z offsets. The whole system can
be rotated by any angle. This allows any user-defined north arrow direction.
X - Specifies the X-direction offset.
Y - Specifies the Y-direction offset.
Z - Specifies the Z-direction offset.
Angle - Specifies the north arrow direction:
90 = World positive Y-axis as north direction. This is the default value.
180 = World positive X-axis as north direction.
270 = World negative Y-axis as north direction.
0 = World negative X-axis as north direction.
Controls parameters for setting position text (POS) that can be displayed on the isometric
drawing file. Review the [Product Folder]\Plant\Isogen\Isogen_Utils\POS_Help.pdf file to locate
the POS number associated with each item. These values are stored with the configuration file
and are used when an isometric is exported. For I-Configure projects, this is the only option for
setting these values. For Project Manager projects, these values can be set from the Project
Manager > Project Default dialog boxes or with this dialog box.
After typing a value, click the Use check box to store the value in the configuration file. To delete
a value from the configuration file, clear the Use box. The values that have the Use box selected
display at the top of the dialog box the next time it displays.
119
ISOGEN Panel
120
ISOGEN Panel
9. Select Revised ASCII from the Content list.
10. Use the Part Numbers, Split Points, Start Point, and Weld Numbers check boxes control
the information that displays in the drawing.
11. Set Spool Identifier to Numeric or Alphabetic.
12. In the Report Location box, type the name and full path location of the report file.
Alternatively, click the Report Location browse button
and navigate to the appropriate
file.
13. Click
to update the active style file with the new property settings.
For more information on Reports, see Report Definition Panel in the ISOGEN
Configuration User's Guide.
to update the active style file with the new property settings.
121
ISOGEN Panel
to update the active style file with the new property settings.
Your material list now displays with the short description and the lines do not overlap, but
are text wrapped.
to update the active style file with the new property settings.
To use this feature you need to draw an adjustable bend using the BENT command. You
also need to update the SKEY of the new bend to PB** (** designates a valid ISOGEN end
type) in the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 73). For more information, see Adjustable Bend
(on page 384).
122
ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN Batch
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Batch
Command line: ISOGENBATCH
Generates isometrics using ISOGEN for one or more line numbers. The command uses the
default settings from the ISOGEN Project Manager. For more information, see ISOGEN Project
Manager / I-Configure (on page 130).
ISOGEN drawings can be created for curved piping by using ISOGEN Batch
on an
Adjustable Bend (on page 384) with SKEY in the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 73) set to
PB** (** designates a valid ISOGEN end type). You need to check the Overwrite check box to
enter the new SKEY. To setup curved piping in isometrics, see Enable curved piping in Plant
isometrics (on page 122).
ISOGENBATCH also exports line number continuation information to ISOGEN.
The software displays the Select Item dialog box which lists all the line numbers available in
the model.
2. Select one or more from the available line numbers. For more information, see Select Item
Dialog Box (on page 166).
CADWorx sends each line number to ISOGEN for processing. ISOGEN might break up the
selected line numbers into multiple sheets.
ISOGENBATCH log file written to: C:\Drawings\Model_ISOGEN.log
The components must be generated with a valid ISOGEN authorized hardware lock. If
not, a message similar to the following displays.
Could NOT process 17 component(s) due to permissions failure...
Only components drawn with the ISOGEN interface are allowed...
No components were written to file...
As each line is processed, any errors encountered are displayed on the screen, and a log
file is created.
The ISOGEN Results dialog box displays. For more information, see ISOGEN Out (on page
118).
ISOGEN Supplemental
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > ISOGEN Supplemental
Command line: ISOGENSUPL
Places supplemental ISOGEN blocks in the drawing. There are several types of block available
for export to ISOGEN:
123
ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN_Arrow
ISOGEN_Wall
ISOGEN_Floor
ISOGEN_Instrument
ISOGEN_BreakIn
Arrow, wall, and floor blocks must be inserted along the center line of a pipe component.
Instrument blocks must have the instrument line connected to the end of an olet component,
TAP component, or a weld gap component.
Break in (Tie in) points must be connected to the end point of a component.
To add other blocks to this menu, see Introduction. The block name must contain
ISOGEN_Arrow, ISOGEN_Instrument, ISOGEN_Wall, ISOGEN_Floor, or ISOGEN_BreakIn
for export to ISOGEN. For example, to add another instrument type, you could name the block
ISOGEN_Instrument_4, and add it to the menu.
If you are placing a flow arrow on a sloped line, align the UCS to the slope before
inserting the arrow.
Stop Sign
CADWorx Plant I tab: Stop Sign
Misc toolbar: Stop Sign
Command line: STOPSIGN
Places stop sign symbols in the drawing. This symbol is used for designating the starting and
ending locations for automatically-generated isometric output. For more information, see
ISOGEN Out (on page 118). Stop signs must be at a weld or connection point on the piping
system. You place these designators on the drawing and then export them to the database. This
could occur manually with Export Pipe (on page 165) or automatically with Setup Live Database
(on page 164).
If stop signs are present when using the Database option of the ISOOUT command, you are
asked if stop signs should be used in generating the ISOs.
Use Stop Signs [Yes/No] <Yes>:
If you select Yes, continuity is checked and the ISOs are broken at each stop sign. If there are
no line numbers or stop signs present in the database, the following prompt displays.
Database does not have any line number or stop signs...
When exporting with the Select ISOGEN Style dialog box isometric generator (ISOGEN
Out (on page 118) or ISOGEN Batch (on page 123)), stop signs are used, if selected.
124
ISOGEN Panel
Offset Tap
CADWorx Plant I tab: Offset Tap
Command line: OTAP
Creates offset tap connections for use by ISOGEN. Offset taps are for use with large branches.
After you create an offset tap connection for a component, you can route piping from that point.
Use offset taps for all major branches of the main pipeline. Offset tap is more robust at
processing branches then tap connection. Use an offset tap connection if ISOGEN reports
discontinuity or tap connection does not produce the necessary results.
Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.
The OTAP command allows several types of pipe-to-pipe connections. The default connection
for OTAP is TANGENTIAL (TTSO). To change to another type of connection, change the
symbol key (SKEY) value on the ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 73) for the OTAP
component.
SKEY
Connection Type
TTSO
TANGENTIAL
TTRF
TANGENTIAL REINFORCED
TOSO
OFFSET
TORF
OFFSET REINFORCED
TSSO
STUB IN
TSRF
STUB IN REINFORCED
TESO
SET ON
TERF
SET ON REINFORCED
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the
following results:
TERF, TESO, TSRF, TSSO:
The length of pipe for the cut list increases to include the OTAP length.
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are the same size, using the following SKEY produces the
following results:
125
ISOGEN Panel
TORF, TOSO, TTRF, TTSO:
The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
If the OTAP connects two pipes that are of different sizes (reduction), ISOGEN Option Switch 2
is used for cut length calculation.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF,
TSSO:
The length of pipe for the cut list is increased to include the OTAP length.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Centre Line of Main Run option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO,
TOSO:
The actual length of pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TERF, TESO, TSRF,
TSSO:
126
The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
ISOGEN Panel
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point option with SKEYs: TORF, TTRF, TTSO:
The length of the pipe for the cut list is adjusted based on the diameter of the main and
reduction pipe sizes.
Set-on Branch - Calc. to Actual Connection Point setting with SKEYs: TOSO:
The actual length of the pipe drawn in the model is used for the cut list.
Option switch 77 Generate PAD Item Code and Show Symbol on Iso option shows a
reinforcement pad on OTAP connections with SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF. A CADWorx
reinforcement pad does not have to be drawn in the model for these three SKEYs.
For all other SKEYs, a CADWorx reinforcement pad must be drawn in the model for it to appear
in the ISO drawing.
127
ISOGEN Panel
ISOGEN option switch 77 No Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads, One Extra Weld
added at Reinforcement Pads, and Two Extra Welds added at Reinforcement Pads settings
control weld numbering at the reinforcement pads. Extra welds are only shown for the following
SKEYs: TTRF, TORF, TERF.
PCF Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF Out
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF Out
Command line: PCFOUT
Creates a piping component (PCF) file from components selected in the drawing.
This command displays the standard file selection dialog box and prompts for a file name.
128
ISOGEN Panel
PCF In
CADWorx Plant I tab: ISOGEN > PCF In
Plant menu: Accessory > ISOGEN > PCF In
Command line: PCFIN
Imports components into the current drawing from a piping component (PCF) file. The PCF file
is usually produced from some other plant design system. This command requires that proper
CADWorx specification and data files exist. If the PCF file uses a specification that does not
match the CADWorx specification exactly, the model created by PCF In
does not function as
expected.
The function displays a standard file selection dialog box. There is an intervention level. For
more information, see System In (on page 206).
Tap
CADWorx Plant I tab: Tap
Command line: TAP
Creates tap connections for use by ISOGEN. The tap connections are used for small branches.
After creating a tap connection for a component, piping can be routed from that point. The
CADWorx ISOGEN interface automatically processes numerous types of taps without needing a
tap connection. Only use a tap connection if ISOGEN reports a discontinuity.
Verify that the main size is set to the size of the tap before drawing this component.
129
ISOGEN Panel
Place a tap
1. Click Tap
2. Select a point for the tap. This point is normally the inner most endpoint of the tapping
component.
3. Select a point on the center line of the component that is being taped.
The software places the tap.
ISOGEN Information
The following topics provide general ISOGEN information.
130
ISOGEN MLD
Alpha size
Not exported ('N.S.' in the MLD is based on the size stored within
the component data.)
Short annotation
'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE2'
Short annotation
-80
ISOGEN Panel
Long annotation
'DESCRIPTION'
Line Number
Tag
'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE3'
Code
'ITEM-CODE'
(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 36) = Yes in current
configuration settings)
Code
'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE4'
(If DataBaseCodesISOGEN (on page 36) = No in current
configuration settings)
Weight
'WEIGHT'
Sort sequence
Not exported
Length
'QTY'
Specification
'COMPONENT-ATTRIBUTE1'
SKEY Information
The following ISOGEN SKEYs can be used by CADWorx when creating an isometric.
ISOGEN SKEY definitions and symbol shapes are available in the ISOGEN Symbol Key
(SKEY) Definitions Reference Guide. You can access this document with the Help > Printable
Guides command in I-Configure.
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
PIPE
PIPE
(Blank)
ELBOW 90 LR BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
ELBOW 90 SR BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
ELBOW-REDUCING
ERBW
ELBOW 45 BUTTWELD
ELBOW
ELBW
ELBOW
EUBW
ELBOW
EUBW
TEE
TEBW
TEE
TEBW
131
ISOGEN Panel
132
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
10
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCBW
11
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
REBW
12
CAP BUTTWELD
CAP
KABW
13
CROSS
CRBW
14
CROSS
CRBW
15
LATERAL BUTTWELD
TEE
TSBW
16
LAPJOINT-STUBEND
FLSE
17
FLANGE / NOZZLE
FLWN /
NZFS
18
FLANGE
FLWN
19
FLANGE SLIP ON
FLANGE
FLSJ
20
FLANGE BLIND
FLANGE-BLIND
FLBL
21
FLANGE
FLLB
22
FLANGE
FLSW
23
FLANGE THREADED
FLANGE
FLSC
24
BOLT
BOLT
(Blank)
25
GASKET
GASKET
(Blank)
26
NIPPLE
COUPLING
NRSC
27
CONCENTRIC SWAGE
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
CSPL
28
ECCENTRIC SWAGE
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
ESPL
29
ELBOW
ELSW
30
ELBOW
ELSW
31
ERSW
32
ELSW
ELBOW
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
33
TEE
TESW
34
TEE
TESW
35
TEE
TSSW
36
CROSS
CRSW
37
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
RBSC
38
CAP
KASW
39
COUPLING
COSW
40
OLET
HCSW
41
UNION
UNSW
42
BLEED RING
MISC-COMPONENT
RP
43
90 LR ELBOW THREADED
ELBOW
ELSC
44
ELBOW
ELSC
45
ELBOW-REDUCING
ERSC
46
45 ELBOW THREADED
ELBOW
ELSC
47
TEE
TESC
48
TEE
TESC
49
LATERAL THREADED
TEE
TSSC
50
CROSS
CRSC
51
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RBSC
52
CAP THREADED
CAP
KASC
53
COUPLING THREADED
COUPLING
COSC
54
OLET
HCSC
55
UNION THREADED
UNION
UNSC
56
PLUG THREADED
MISC-COMPONENT
PL
133
ISOGEN Panel
134
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
57
ELBOLET
CESW
58
THREADED ELL-O-LET
ELBOLET
CESC
59
WELD ELL-O-LET
ELBOLET
CEBW
60
SOCK-O-LET
OLET
SKSW
61
THREAD-O-LET
OLET
THSC
62
WELD-O-LET
OLET
WTBW
63
VBFL or
VBBW
64
VALVE
VBSW
65
VALVE
VBSC
66
VALVE
VYFL or
VYBW
67
VALVE
CKFL or
CKBW
68
VALVE
CKSW
69
VALVE
CKSC
70
VTFL or
VTBW
71
VALVE
VTSW
72
VALVE
VTSC
73
VALVE
VGFL or
VGBW
74
VALVE
VGSW
75
VALVE
VGSC
76
VPFL or
VPBW
77
VPSW
VALVE
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
78
VALVE
VPSC
79
VALVE-ANGLE
ARFL or
ARBW
80
VALVE-ANGLE
ARSW
81
VALVE-ANGLE
ARSC
82
VALVE
VNSW
83
VALVE
VNSC
84
VALVE-3WAY
V3FL or
V3BW
85
VALVE-3WAY
V3SW
86
VALVE-3WAY
V3SC
87
VALVE-4WAY
V4FL or
V4BW
88
VALVE-4WAY
V4SW
89
VALVE-4WAY
V4SC
90
INSTRUMENT
CVFL
91
INSTRUMENT
CVSW
92
INSTRUMENT
CVSC
93
FILTER
FIFL
94
FILTER
FISW
95
STRAINER THREADED
FILTER
FISC
96
VALVE-ANGLE
AVFL or
AVBW
97
VALVE-ANGLE
AVSW
98
VALVE-ANGLE
AVSC
135
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
99
VALVE
VKSW
100
VALVE
VKSC
101
SPECTACLE BLIND
MISC-COMPONENT
SB
102
EXPANSION BELLOWS
MISC-COMPONENT
EXFL
103 to
NCFL or
107
MISC-COMPONENT
(NCFL) or
136
XVFL
MULTI-PORTCOMPONENT (XVFL)
108
ELBOW
ELBW
109
ELBOW
ELBW
110
WYE BW
TEE
TSBW
111
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCSW
112
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCSC
113
RESW
114
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
RESC
115
FLANGE REDUCING SO
FLANGE-REDUCINGCONCENTRIC
FLRC
116
FLANGE-REDUCINGCONCENTRIC
FLRC
117
FLANGE REDUCING WN
FLANGE-REDUCINGCONCENTRIC
FLRC
118
COUPLING
COSW
119
COUPLING THREADED
COUPLING
COSC
120
OLET
LASW
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
121
LATERAL-O-LET THREADED
OLET
LASC
122
LATERAL-O-LET WELD
OLET
LABW
123
NIP-O-LET THREADED
OLET
NISC
124
NIP-O-LET PLAIN
OLET
NIPL
125
PIPE FLANGED
PIPE-FIXED
FPFL
126
ELBOW 90 LR FLANGED
ELBOW
ELFL
127
ELBOW 45 FLANGED
ELBOW
ELFL
128
TEE
TEFL
129
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RCFL
130
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
REFL
131
WYE FLANGED
TEE
TSFL
132
VALVE
VDSW
133
VALVE
VDSC
134
VALVE
VDFL or
VDBW
135
VALVE
VRSW
136
VALVE
VRSC
137
VALVE
VRFL or
VRBW
138
VALVE
CKSW
139
VALVE
CKSC
140
VALVE
CKFL or
CKBW
141
VALVE
VTSW
142
VALVE
VTSC
137
ISOGEN Panel
138
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
143
VALVE
VTFL
144
ELBOW
EL**
145
ER**
146
ELBOW
EL**
147
TEE
TE**
148
TEE
TE**
149
CROSS
CR**
150
CROSS
CR**
151
TEE
TE**
152
REDUCER-CONCENTRIC
RC**
153
REDUCER-ECCENTRIC
RE**
154
CONNECTOR
MPBW
155
TEE
TS**
156
CAP
KA**
157
BNUT or
CLMP
158
VALVE
VB**
159
VALVE
VY**
160
VALVE
VC**
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
161
VALVE
VT**
162
VALVE
VG**
163
VALVE
VP**
164
VALVE-3WAY
V3**
165
VALVE-ANGLE
AV**
166
VALVE, VALVE-ANGLE,
VALVE-3WAY
ZG**, 2Z**,
3Z**
167
VALVE-MULTIWAY
MZ**
168
VALVE-MULTIWAY
MZ**
169
BEND
BE**
170
BEND
BE**
171
TEE
TE**
172
Not exported
Not
exported
173
WELD GAP
WELD
WW
174 to 197
(Future Components)
198
GENERIC INSERT
Not exported
Not
exported
199
WELD GAP
WELD
WW
200
BEND PIPE
ELBOW, BEND
ELBW,
BUBW,
PBBW,
139
ISOGEN Panel
PRGM #
CADWorx Name
ISOGEN Identifier
SKEY
201
MITER PIPE
GAP
(Blank)
202
ROLLED PIPE
MISC-COMPONENT
FXBW
203
RESTRAINTS
SUPPORT
SKID
204
PAD or SADDLE
REINFORCEMENT-PAD
(Blank)
205
RIGID ELEMENT
GAP
(Blank)
206
SKIPPED ELEMENT
GAP
(Blank)
207
SPECIAL RIGID
GAP
(Blank)
208
TUBING
(Blank) or
PB
209
STOP SIGN
ISO-SPLIT-POINT
(Blank)
210
TAP CONNECTION
TAP-CONNECTION
(Blank)
211
TEE-SET-ON
TTSO
212
START-CO-ORDS
(Blank)
140
PL
BW
FL
LN
LN
MP
MP
MP
ISOGEN Panel
8
MP
CL
10
CL
11
CL
12
CL
13
CL
14
SW
15
SC
141
ISOGEN Panel
142
SECTION 5
OrthoGen Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: OrthoGen
Command Name
Command Line
OrthoGen Launch
CADWorx Plant I tab: OrthoGen > OrthoGen Launch
Command line: ORTHOGENLAUNCH
Launches the OrthoGen application, which enables you to create an OrthoGen script (SCR) file
to be used in rendering an OrthoGen drawing.
For additional information about OrthoGen see the OrthoGen Help files.
See Also
OrthoGen Out (on page 143)
OrthoGen Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: OrthoGen > OrthoGen Out
Command line: ORTHOGENOUT
Generates OrthoGen drawings from a script (SCR) file created using the OrthoGen application.
OrthoGen annotates pipe lines, steel, equipment, HVAC, and more. Annotations are based on
styles created using the OrthoGen application.
1. Open a drawing, and then click Layout or create your own layout.
2. Click OrthoGen Out on the OrthoGen panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab. Alternatively,
type ORTHOGENOUT on the command line, and then press ENTER.
The Open dialog box displays.
3. Select a script file created from OrthoGen, and then click Open.
The OrthoGen script file produces the label and dimensional information on the
Orthographic drawing.
See Also
OrthoGen Launch (on page 143)
143
OrthoGen Panel
144
SECTION 6
LNum Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum
You can create and store line numbers in different configuration files for various requirements in
a variety of formats. There can be any number of categories within a line number.
When you start a new drawing, the line number system is not active by default.
Click Setup
to automatically assign line numbers when you place components. After you set
the line number in the current drawing, it remains set until you change it.
Command Name
Setup - Modifies line number configurations. For more
information, see Setup (on page 146).
Command Line
NUMBERSETUP
Set - Sets line number from three different sources: a P&ID NUMBERSET
project, the current drawing, or a component that you
select. For more information, see Set (on page 147).
Count - Sets the present line number count value. For
more information, see Count (on page 148).
NUMBERCOUNT
NUMBER+
NUMBER-
NUMBERASSIGN
NUMBERANNOTATE
COMP2LINE
LINEISOLATE
145
LNum Panel
Setup
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Setup
Line Number toolbar: Setup
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Setup
Command line: NUMBERSETUP
Modifies any line number configuration. You can turn the line numbering system on or off. If the
system is on, it can operate in a static or dynamic mode.
In the dynamic mode, CADWorx adjusts the line number according to the size or specification.
In the static mode, you must manually change the size and specification. Static is useful when
all components and sizes of a particular piping run are required to have the same line number
(such as, the 3/4 vent on an 8 process line needs a line number of 8-150-2001-N). Static line
numbering is also useful when selecting runs of piping for other functions with CADWorx. For
more information, see LineNumberSystem (on page 41).
This system also works with a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file. You can change the
configuration file location in SETUP to use the same project configuration as any P&ID project.
For more information, see Setup (on page 28). Click Add in the Category group in this dialog
box to select additional fields located in the process lines table of a typical P&ID project
database. When using a P&ID project, changes made to a line number configuration within
CADWorx reflect within the P&ID project.
If the system is not using a CADWorx P&ID setup configuration file, the additional fields are
obtained from the DATABASE.TBL file located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. You
must manually edit this file for any modifications required of the existing fields within the default
line number system.
146
LNum Panel
System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) - Indicates that each component placed in the drawing
receives a line number. When this option is cleared, the line number is not placed on the
component.
System On (Static Size/Spec) - Indicates that the line number system uses the value in the
Default value box, including the size and specification. This allows you to type anything for the
size and specification.
Preview - Displays the line number based on the selected categories. The line number added to
components looks similar to the Preview value.
Move Up - Moves the selected item higher in the Category list. The new order also displays in
the Preview box.
Move Down - Moves the selected item lower in the Category list. The new order also displays
in the Preview box.
Set
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Set
Line Number toolbar: Set
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Set
Command line: NUMBERSET
Sets the line number from one of three sources: a P&ID project, the current drawing, or a
selected component.
P&ID - Requires a valid CADWorx P&ID project using an Access database. If the configuration
file is the same as an existing P&ID project, this option automatically supplies all the line
numbers within that project from the process lines table. The line numbers supplied are of the
same format as the project. If the configuration file is not the same, a standard file dialog box
displays requesting the location of the database to use.
Current Drawing - Sets the line numbers based on the current drawing. This option searches
the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select Item dialog box. This option
requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 41) variable is set to 2. This is the same as
selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System dialog box.
For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 146).
Component - Sets the line numbers based on a component that you select from the current
drawing. This option searches the entire drawing and displays all the line numbers in the Select
Item dialog box. This option requires that the LineNumberSystem (on page 41) variable is set to
2. This is the same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line
Numbering System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box
(on page 146).
Set line numbers based on the current drawing (on page 148)
147
LNum Panel
2. Type P on the command line and press ENTER, or select Process drawings from the
popup menu.
The Select Database File dialog box displays.
3. Select the P&ID Access database file.
4. Click Open on the Select Database File dialog box.
The software sets the line numbers.
2. Type D on the command line and press ENTER, or select current Drawing from the popup
menu.
The Select Item dialog box displays.
3. If needed, use the Filter box to limit the items that display.
4. Select the item to use from the list.
5. Click OK.
The software sets the line numbers.
2. Type C on the command line and press ENTER, or select Component from the popup
menu.
3. Select the component in the drawing.
The software sets the line numbers.
Count
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Count
Line Number toolbar: Count
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Count
Command line: NUMBERCOUNT
Sets the present line number count value.
This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 41) variable to 1. This is the
same as selecting the System On (Dynamic Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering
System dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page
146).
148
LNum Panel
2. Type the line count value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software sets the line count number.
Increment
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Increment
Line Number toolbar: Increment
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Increment
Command line: NUMBER+
Increases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0001, then
this increments it to 0002.
Decrement
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Decrement
Line Number toolbar: Decrement
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Decrement
Command line: NUMBERDecreases the line number count value. For example, if the current line count value is 0002, this
decrements it to 0001.
Assign
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Assign
Line Number toolbar: Assign
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Assign
Command line: NUMBERASSIGN
Assigns new or different line numbers to existing components. In the static mode, the line
number is replaced exactly as it is previewed in the Setup dialog box. This means that a 3/4
line can be assigned an 8-150-2001-N line number. When in dynamic mode, the line number is
automatically adjusted and the 3/4 line receives a line number of 3/4-150-2001-N. This is
based on the present size and specification listed within the component's data.
When selecting a component with a line number already attached, a message appears. Select
Yes to assign the component the new line number. You can make your selection by window,
fence, or by individually selecting a component. During the process, a rubberband cursor
appears indicating which component is being assigned the new line number.
149
LNum Panel
Annotate
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Annotate
Line Number toolbar: Annotate
Plant menu: Accessory > Line Numbers > Annotate
Command line: NUMBERANNOTATE
Labels components with existing line numbers. The text size is based upon the AutoCAD
environment variable TEXTSIZE and is placed on the default text layer. You can select
individual components to annotate. During the labeling process, a rubberband cursor appears
indicating which component is being labeled.
150
LNum Panel
Line
CADWorx Plant I tab: LNum > Line
Setting toolbar: Line
Plant menu: Utility > Set Component > Line
Command line: COMP2LINE
Sets the current line number by selecting a component with the required line number. Any
components created after running this command use the new line number.
This option requires that you set the LineNumberSystem (on page 41) variable to 2. This is the
same as selecting the System On (Static Size/Spec) option in the Line Numbering System
dialog box. For more information, see Line Numbering System Dialog Box (on page 146).
Line Isolate
Plant menu: Utility > Line Isolate
Command line: LINEISOLATE
Isolates components based on their line numbers or their specifications. You can use this
command to isolate an entire line number or to isolate one line number and include surrounding
buildings or equipment. It can also turn off any isolation of components or surrounding
equipment and building.
Isolate - Isolates only components with particular specifications or line numbers. This option
hides all objects including non-CADWorx objects in the drawing. To make them visible again,
run this command again and select the Show all option.
Partial isolate - Works similar to the Isolate option, except that it leaves the surrounding
graphics (building, equipment, dimensions, and so on) visible. This option has the same
additional options as Isolate.
Show all - Turns off any isolation and makes all objects in the drawing visible.
Spec - Lists all specs used in the model. You can select one or more specifications to isolate.
Line number - Lists all line numbers used in the drawing. You can select one or more line
numbers to isolate.
List - Displays a dialog box listing either the specifications or line numbers within the drawing.
You can select one or more items using the standard Windows selection methods.
Select component - Select a component in the drawing.
151
LNum Panel
152
SECTION 7
Command line
BOM Setup - Customizes the Bill of Material schedule to any style BOMSETUP
or layout that you need. For more information, see Bill of Material
Setup (on page 154).
Cut BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each piece BOMCUT
of pipe with a length and a tag. For more information, see Cut Pipe
Bill of Material (on page 157).
Total BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one tag for BOMTOTAL
a total length of pipe in each size. For more information, see Total
Pipe Bill of Material (on page 159).
Single BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with each
BOMSINGLE
selected object on a line by itself. For more information, see Single
Pipe Bill of Material (on page 160).
Export BOM - Exports the steel Bill of Material schedule to an
external file format that you specify. For more information, see
Export Pipe Bill of Material (on page 162).
BOMEXPORT
BOMIMPORT
BOMDELETE
Tag Toggle - Turns on and off the placement of tags. For more
information, see Tag Toggle Bill of Material (on page 163).
TAGTOGGLE
TAGRELOCATE
TAGINSERT
153
DBAUDIT
154
155
156
Ascending - Sorts from small numbers to larger numbers (1 to 100) and from A to Z.
Descending - Sorts from large numbers to small numbers (100 to 1) and from Z to A.
If you want the BOM to sort from large size piping to small size piping, use Descending for
MAIN_NOM and RED_NOM.
Move Up and Move Down - Defines the sort order in the BOM. Select a column in the BOM
Columns Selected list, and then click Move Up to sort that column before other columns. Click
Move Down to sort the column after columns higher in the list.
When you add the line number (LINE_NUM) to BOM Columns Selected, the bill of
material export options (BOMCUT, BOMTOTAL, and BOMEXPORT) calculates the
components by the line number rather than the total number of the selected components.
157
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
158
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
159
160
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
161
When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a
single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in
Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard
selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from
text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be
totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension
Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.
An additional command called BOMEXTERNAL is available to export a project database
to a file based on the columns chosen in the BOMSETUP.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Export
162
Tag Location
Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Location
Command line: TAGRELOCATE (EQUIPTAGRELOCATE in CADWorx Equipment)
Relocates a tag. This command is useful when tags are placed on top of each other. Optionally,
this command deletes the connector line from the item mark to the component. This is useful
when multiple items are required for one location, such as gaskets and bolts associated with a
flange.
Tags and the associated leader lines are grouped. This makes them easier to
manipulate. You can use the AutoCAD Group command to un-group the items and manually
rearrange them.
163
Insert Tag
Plant menu: Utilities > Nozzle Schedule > Tag > Insert
Command line: TAGINSERT (EQUIPTAGINSERT in CADWorx Equipment)
Places tags on the drawing without having to run the main Bill of Material generator. The tag is
scaled according to the present text size.
When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that
component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the
drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then
the item is deleted from the database.
When a component or a group of components are copied from a drawing to a new drawing
that uses the same live database, the copied components are duplicated in the live database
with the new drawing name.
When a component or a group of components are cut from a drawing and placed in another
drawing that uses the same live database, the components duplicate in the live database
with the new drawing name. When the old drawing is saved and closed any duplicate items
from the first drawing are deleted from the live database because they are no longer on the
first drawing.
All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.
On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are
updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the
database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.
Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the
type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.
Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create
the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an
existing database.
SQL Server Database Name and Schema - Defines the Microsoft SQL Server database
information. You must have already created the ODBC schemas (refer to the installation guide
for help). Type the database name in the Database box. Type the ODBC schema name in the
Schema box, either Plant_SQL_SERVER or Steel_SQL_SERVER.
164
No dialog (new drawings are in Live DB) - Select to place new drawings automatically in
the database. Selecting this option requires that a new drawing be named and saved
immediately on creation. Drawings that use a live database must be in the same folder with
the appropriate configuration file.
No dialog (new drawings are not in Live DB) - Select to not add new drawings to the
database. You can add drawings to the live database later using this command.
Show dialog - Select to display a dialog box on which you can choose to use a database or
not.
Existing components in drawings can be added to the database by using DBFGEN for
Pipe or SDBFGEN for Steel. For more information, see Export Pipe (on page 165).
Export Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Export
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Export
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Export
Command line: DBFGEN
Exports CADWorx component information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
When using live database, this command updates the appropriate database setup for the
drawing.
Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a
Microsoft Excel file.
Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of
the dialog display the file name and folder in use.
Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the
database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database
according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to
maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database
file at the same time.
New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type.
165
Wildcards
166
Character
Used to
# (pound)
@ (at)
. (period)
[...]
[~...]
- (hyphen)
, (comma)
` (reverse quote)
167
Import Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > Import
Pipe BOM / DB toolbar: Import
Plant menu: Accessory > Database > Import
Command line: DBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file. This
command is not available when you are using a live database.
You can select one or more drawings to import. CADWorx then draws the imported components
in single line mode. These can be converted to any other modes using the Mode Convert (on
page 81) tools available.
1. On the Pipe BOM / DB panel, click Import
2.
3.
4.
5.
168
169
170
C.G. Generator
CADWorx Plant I tab: Pipe BOM / DB > C.G. Generator
Plant menu: Accessory > C.G. Generator
Command line: TCG
Calculates center of gravity for all components drawn in X,Y planes (2D plans) or in X,Y,Z
planes (3D Model). You can use a generic attach (from Plant > Toolbars > Misc) which
provides the center of gravity location and weight. For more information on specifying a center of
gravity location for a generic attach, see Generic Attach (on page 202) or Steel - Generic
Attachment (on page 295).
Selection can be done by crossing, window, or selecting individual component.
Selected Components
Select - Enables you to select items to calculate the total center of gravity for that item.
Piping - Enables piping to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the selected
component counters in the corresponding box.
Piping Insulation - Enables piping insulation to be calculated for the total center of gravity.
Reports the selected component counters in the corresponding box.
Steel - Enables steel to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the selected
component counters in the corresponding box.
HVAC - Enables HVAC to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the selected
component counters in the corresponding box.
Equipment - Enables equipment to be calculated for the total center of gravity. Reports the
selected component counters in the corresponding box.
You must have a material set for the equipment, and then run EQUIPCG before you
can get a center of gravity calculation for equipment in CADWorx Plant.
Report Options
Title - Specifies a title for the report that prints when CG is calculated.
Path - Specifies the location of the report file. Click the Path ellipsis to change the location and
save the file.
Print report to command line - Prints the total center of gravity report to the command line.
View Report - Indicates that the software opens the report after the center of gravity calculates.
Insert drawing marker - Inserts a drawing marker for the total center of gravity.
1. Click C.G. Generator
on the Pipe BOM / DB panel in the CADWorx Plant I tab.
Alternatively, type TCG on the command line and then press ENTER.
The Total CG Calculation dialog box displays.
2. Select the type of components to calculate center of gravity.
171
Before you can get a center of gravity calculation for equipment in CADWorx Plant, you
must have a material set for the equipment, and then you must run EQUIPCG.
When selecting equipment to calculate the center of gravity, you have the following
choices:
Select all.
172
SECTION 8
Misc Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc
Command Name
Auto Connect - Turns automatic connection on or off. For
more information, see Auto Connect (on page 174).
Command Line
CONNECTOG
WELDSIZE
JOINPIPE
USERCREATE
Top Works Add - Adds top works to a valve already drawn TOPWORKSADD
in the model. For more information, see Top Works Add (on
page 197)
Top Works Change - Changes the orientation of or
deletes top works already associated with a valve. For
more information, see Top Works Change (on page 198).
TOPWORKSCHANGE
C2OUT
BREAKPIPE
ENGENERIC
GENERIC
C2IN
CHANGEELEVATION
173
Misc Panel
Elbow Centerline - Turns on or off elbow centerlines for
use with isometrics. For more information, see Elbow
Centerline (on page 209).
ELBOWCL
ISOFLAG
SYSVIS
Auto Connect
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Auto Connect
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Connect
Settings toolbar:
Command line: CONNECTTOG
Turns automatic connection on or off. Auto connection provides minimum prompts and makes
certain assumptions.
The last component placed in the drawing provides the starting point for the next
component. The direction of the last component indicates the direction of the new
component.
If you select a component which requires a second direction, such as an elbow, or tee, there
are additional prompts requesting the direction.
This is useful for placing components down a line. It can dramatically decrease the time required
to place components in assemblies, such as control valve bypass loops.
If you have run any type of mode conversion, the last point is not available. The software
prompts you to pick the starting point.
Auto Connect does not work in conjunction with Router (on page 225).
174
Misc Panel
Group On/Off
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Group On/Off
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Group On/Off
Settings toolbar:
Command line: GROUPTOG
Turns on or off the grouping of the centerline of the component with the accompanying graphics.
This is useful for selecting any piece of the component rather than only the centerline. By
default, grouping is turned on.
Weld Size
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Weld Size
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Weld Size
Command line: WELDSIZE
Specifies the default size of the weld dots that accompany single line components. This
command also allows for the change of weld dots already placed in the drawing.
2. Type the new weld size on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software changes the weld dot size.
Join Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Join Pipe
Command line: JOINPIPE
Changes segmented piping to non-segmented piping.
Run - Joins the entire run of pipe.
Segment - Joins the selected segments of pipe.
175
Misc Panel
Join by Run
1. Click Join Pipe
Join by Segment
1. Click Join Pipe
User Shapes
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Create
Misc toolbar: Create
Command line: USERCREATE
Creates symmetrical or nonsymmetrical user shape components. Symmetrical shapes require
you to draw an outline that can be used to create the user component. Non-symmetrical shapes
require a block or an object completely drawn in 2D and 3D that represents the complete
component. A symmetrical object can be converted from 2D to 3D Mode, or vice versa, using
the mode convert (on page 81) commands. It does not allow double-line to single-line
conversion in 2D mode. Non-symmetrical shapes can only convert between isometric and solids
(Convert Isometric (on page 82) or 3D Solids (on page 82)).
1. Create the component.
2. Modify the specification.
3. Click Create
, or type USERCREATE on the command line and press ENTER.
The Define User Shape dialog box displays.
Each dialog box option is explained below.
User shape components can also be tagged as optional components in the specification. This
allows for an infinite number of additional components.
For symmetrically shaped components, draw a 2D polyline indicating the outline of the shape.
The symmetrical shape is limited to straight lines between vertices in the polyline. In other
words, there cannot be a fillet radius on any corner of the polyline. If fillets exist, the routine
draws them with chamfered corners. Draw only half of the shape on one side of the centerline.
We recommend preparing an outline before trying to draw the polyline. For example, draw the
component using standard AutoCAD methods or CADWorx components, and then draw a
polyline around the contour.
For symmetrical shapes, the polyline may overlap as shown in the example below for 2D
solids (drawn to each indicated point, PT1, PT2, and so on). For use with 3D solids, the polyline
cannot overlap (there cannot be a PT4 or PT7). If the polyline overlaps, an ACIS error occurs
indicating the object cannot be revolved.
176
Misc Panel
For non-symmetrically shaped components, you must first create a 2D and 3D representation.
This representation needs to show all the required details of the component. The 3D
representation is used when in the 3D drawing mode. It can be used for orthographic and
model-type representation. The 2D representation is used when in the 2D isometric drawing
mode.
After the polyline or components are complete, click Create
. This creates a data file in the
required folder with the required file name. For non-symmetrically shaped components, it also
creates two drawing files: one 2D and one 3D. The drawing names have appended in square
brackets, the size and drawing mode (for example, [4.0-3D]). The file name must be unique.
User Shapes are stored in Product Folder]\Plant\Spec. You can change were User Shapes are
stored under Folder Setting in the Define User Shape dialog box.
Make sure to set a default size and specification first. Create
creating components with different sizes.
Component Setup
Name - Specifies the name of the user shape. There is a 20 character limit.
Number - Specifies the number of the user shape. Select a number in the range of 1 to 5.
Specification - Sets the specification for the user shape.
Assign to Spec - Assigns the user shape to other specifications.
Save to Catalog - Saves the user shape to the catalog.
Folder Settings
Block - Specifies a block to form the shape. If the component is created on layer 0, it
inherits the specification color when inserted. This option requires a fully developed
component drawn to the correct size with AutoCAD or CADWorx. The software removes
any attached extended entity data. This option is used with non-symmetrical
components.
Select Polyline - Specifies a polyline to form the shape. The software automatically
extracts all the points from the selected polyline. You must first select the reference and
end points. This option is used with symmetrical components.
Pick Point - Specifies each point required to form the shape. You must first select the
reference and end points (PT1 and PT37 in the following figure). This option is used
with symmetrical components. Press ENTER to end the sequence.
177
Misc Panel
Main Size - Sets the main size of the user shape.
Reduction Size - Sets the reduction size of the user shape.
Select 3D Solid - Creates 3D user shapes.
Select 2D Double Line - Creates 2D double line user shapes.
Select 2D Single Line - Creates 2d single line user shapes.
Define Connections - Defines the end type connection for the user shape. You can select
Buttweld, Socket, Threaded, or Flanges. The user shape must have been previously selected
with either Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line.
If the component is less than 1/16" long (2 mm when in metric mode), the associated xdata is in
an inserted block named XATB. It is located on the default layer named SYSTEM instead of the
CL layer so that it does not plot or display while this layer is turned off.
If the component is non-symmetrical, there is an inserted block named NATB located at the start
point. This block, like the XATB block, contains all the associated xdata and acts as any other
component.
When a 2D representation of a non-symmetrical component is not present (that is, only the 3D
representation option is used) and the component is converted to the 3D mode, the NATB
remains. This block can be converted to 2D but does not have any graphics in the 3D mode.
The NATB and XATB blocks can be moved and controlled just as any other CADWorx
component.
Spec Properties
BOM Type - Sets the bill of material type for the user shape.
Color - Sets the color of the user shape.
Layer - Sets the layer for the user shape. This setting defaults to the layer named as the
specification in the Define User Shape dialog box.
Material - Sets the material type of the user shape.
Density - Sets the density of the user shape.
Weight - Sets the weight of the user shape
Length - Sets the length of the user shape.
Sort Sequence - Sets the sort sequence of the user shape.
Optional Component - Sets the user shape as an optional component.
With the use of optional components, a specification file can have an unlimited number of
user shapes.
Description
Long - Describes the component in long format.
Short - Describes the component in short format.
Tag - Tags the user shape with the entered information.
Notes - Sets other information about the user shape.
178
Misc Panel
Isogen Symbol Information
Identifier - Identifies the isogenic information for the component.
SKEY - Sets the SKEY for the user shape.
Rating
Component Class - Sets the specification class for the user shape.
Temperature Rating - Sets the highest temperature allowed for the user shape.
Pressure Rating - Sets the highest pounds per square inch allowed for the component.
179
Misc Panel
180
Misc Panel
21. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
22. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
23. Select Optional Component to make this component an optional component.
24. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
25. Type the short description in the Short box.
26. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
27. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
28. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.
29. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.
30. Type the component class in the Component Class box.
31. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.
32. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
33. Click OK.
The software creates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 541) toolbar. For more information
on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197) or
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197).
2. Select the name of the user shape, you want to modify, in the Name box.
The software auto-populates the boxes with the information you used when you initially
created the shape.
3. Change any other data as needed.
4. When finished making changes to the file, click OK.
The software updates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 541) toolbar. For more information
on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197) or
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197).
181
Misc Panel
1. Type EDITUSERSHAPE on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select the user shape to edit.
3. Select connection points for each point you want to change, and then select an end type.
4. Changing the connections points and end types, and then press ENTER to finish.
The connection points update in the drawing and the catalog, with routing points added to
the user shape.
182
NUT
BNUT
CAP
KA**
MISCCOMPONENTRETURN
BR**
Misc Panel
TEE
TE**, TS**
REDUCERCONCENTRICTEED
CT**
REDUCERECCENTRICTEED
EX**
VALVE-3WAY
V3**
183
Misc Panel
184
VALVE-4WAY
V4**
MISCCOMPONENTANGLE
BA**
CROSS
CR**
Misc Panel
MISCCOMPONENTOFFSET*^
BO**
VALVEMULTIWAY***
MD**
VALVEMULTIWAY***
MD**
*^For MISC-COMPONENT-OFFSET, point 1 and point 2 are required. Point 3 and Point 4 are
optional.
185
Misc Panel
186
Misc Panel
The Define User Shape dialog box displays.
13. Select the main size in the Main Size list.
14. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.
The Reducing Size list becomes available.
15. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.
Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file.
16. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list. For more information, see User Shapes
(on page 176).
17. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.
18. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.
19. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.
20. Type the density of the component in the Density box.
21. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
22. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
23. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
24. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
25. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
26. Type the short description in the Short box.
27. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
28. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
29. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.
30. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.
31. Type the component class in the Component Class box.
32. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.
33. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
34. Click OK.
The software creates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 541) toolbar. For more information
on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197) or
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197).
187
Misc Panel
188
Misc Panel
20. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.
21. Type the density of the component in the Density box.
22. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
23. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
24. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
25. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
26. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
27. Type the short description in the Short box.
28. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
29. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
30. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.
31. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.
32. Type the component class in the Component Class box.
33. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.
34. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
35. Click OK.
The software creates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 541) toolbar. For more
information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing
(on page 197) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197).
189
Misc Panel
9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.
Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file.
10. Click Select 3D Solid, Select 2D Double Line, or Select 2D Single Line and follow the
prompts.
11. Click Define Connections.
Pick direction.
12. Select a direction in the drawing.
Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
13. Select an end type for the connection.
Pick connection 1 or <Enter to finish>.
14. Select a connection point on the drawing.
Pick direction.
15. Select a direction in the drawing.
Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
16. Select an end type for the connection.
Pick connection 2 or <Enter to finish>.
17. Press ENTER to finish.
The Define User Shape dialog box displays.
Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the
nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and
affect the scaling if not properly selected.
18. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.
19. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.
20. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.
21. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.
22. Type the density of the component in the Density box.
23. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
24. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
25. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
26. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
27. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
28. Type the short description in the Short box.
29. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
190
Misc Panel
30. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
31. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.
32. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.
33. Type the component class in the Component Class box.
34. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.
35. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
36. Click OK.
The software creates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 541) toolbar. For more
information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing
(on page 197) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197).
191
Misc Panel
13. Click Define Connections.
Pick direction.
14. Select a direction in the drawing.
Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
15. Select an end type for the user shape.
Pick connection 1 or <Enter to finish>.
16. If you have more than one connection point select each one as prompted, and then press
ENTER when finished.
The Define User Shape dialog box displays.
Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the
nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and
affect the scaling if not properly selected.
17. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.
18. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.
19. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.
20. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.
21. Type the density of the component in the Density box.
22. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
23. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
Type the short description in the Short box.
Type the tag information in the Tag box.
Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
192
Misc Panel
193
Misc Panel
18. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.
19. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.
20. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.
21. Type the density of the component in the Density box.
22. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
23. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
24. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
25. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
26. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
27. Type the short description in the Short box.
28. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
29. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
30. Type the ISOGEN identifier in the Identifier box.
31. Select an SKEY in the SKEY list.
32. Type the component class in the Component Class box.
33. Type the temperature rating in the Temperature Rating box.
34. Type the pressure rating in the Pressure Rating box.
35. Click OK.
The software creates the user shape.
The user shape is now available on the Misc (on page 541) toolbar. For more
information on placing the user shape, see Place a symmetrical user shape in the drawing
(on page 197) or Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the drawing (on page 197).
194
Misc Panel
8. If the component reduces, select the Reducing check box.
The Reducing Size list becomes available.
9. Select the reducing size in the Reducing Size list.
Do not mix reducing and non-reducing components in the same file.
10. Click Select 2D Single Line.
Select 2D single line representation.
11. Click a point in the upper left of the drawing, drag the mouse, and then click in the lower
right of the drawing to select the entire user shape to create. Press ENTER to finish
selection.
Pick insert point.
12. Select an insertion point on the component.
13. Click Define Connections.
Pick direction.
14. Select a direction in the drawing.
Set End Type for this connection: [Buttweld/Socket/Threaded/Flanges]<Butt weld End
Type>.
15. Select an end type for the user shape.
Pick connection 1 or <Enter to finish>.
16. If you have more than one connection point, select each one as prompted, and then press
ENTER when finished.
The Define User Shape dialog box displays.
Connection points indicate where other equipment or components attach to the
nonsymmetrical user shape. These points are very important when exporting the model and
affect the scaling if not properly selected.
17. Select the bill of material type in the BOM Type list.
18. Select the color of the user shape in the Color list.
19. Type the layer number of the component in the Layer box.
20. If available, select the material information for the user shape in the Material list.
21. Type the density of the component in the Density box.
22. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
23. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
24. Type the sort sequence for the user shape in the Sort Sequence box.
25. Select Optional Component if you want this to be an optional component.
26. Type the long description in the Long box. The long description is used within the data file.
27. Type the short description in the Short box.
28. Type the tag information in the Tag box.
195
Misc Panel
29. Type notes in the Notes box, if needed.
The software may automatically define the next five options. If so, you can change or
use the information as needed.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
196
Misc Panel
197
Misc Panel
System Out
CADWorx Plant I tab: MISC > System Out
Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System Out
Command line: C2OUT
Creates a CAESAR II input file. This input file can then be used in CAESAR II without any
modification. Components selected in the drawing convert to the appropriate elements for the
stress model. For example, a tee connected to pipe in all directions is represented with one
node at the intersection instead of four (three at the ends and one at the intersection). This
provides the stress analyst a model that is ready for use. All pertinent information is transferred
(weights, wall thickness, and so on).
The selection process in the drawing environment is available in two ways. The first requires
selecting the components with the standard selection processes in AutoCAD. This can include
selection by crossing, window or any other preferred method. The second selection process
allows the selection by line number or selecting a component with an existing line number. The
database option is not available with this command.
You must set the LanguageFile to the regional language when using a language-specific
specification. For example, if you have Chinese characters in your specification, set the
LanguageFile to Chinese_Simplified.dic. If you do not, System Out (on page 198) and
System In (on page 206) do not function correctly. For more information, see LanguageFile (on
page 38).
198
Misc Panel
Example
1. Select the starting point at node 10.
2. Select anywhere along the centerline toward node 90 for a direction.
3. Select the intersection at 30, and then select a direction toward 50.
4. Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 50.
5. Select the intersection at 50 and then select a direction toward 70.
6. You could let CAESAR II automatically node the rest of the model, or you could finish by
manually selecting the next point at 30 and then selecting a direction toward 90.
7. Select a point at 50 and then select a direction toward 110.
8. Select a point at 40 and then select a direction toward 150.
Make sure Ortho is off, and use OSnap NEArest to pick along centerlines for directions.
199
Misc Panel
Break Pipe
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Break Pipe
Command line: BREAKPIPE
Changes non-segmented piping to segmented piping.
Length - Specifies breaking the segments by length of the segments.
Number - Specifies breaking the segments by the number of segments.
Break by Length
1. Click Break Pipe
Break by Number
1. Click Break Pipe
200
Misc Panel
Flange Rating - Specifies the flange rating for the nozzle generic attachment that you are
creating or editing.
Flange Thickness - Specifies the flange thickness for the nozzle generic attachment that you
are creating or editing.
Flange Type - Specifies the flange type for the nozzle generic attachment that you are creating
or editing.
Layer - Specifies the layer for the generic nozzle.
Color - Specifies the color for the generic nozzle. You can use the Select Color option from the
list to open the AutoCAD Color Index, and select any color.
Points List - Enables you to select the face end and buttweld end points for the nozzle generic
attachment.
Face end - Specifies the face end point with a red arrow on the nozzle generic attachment.
Buttweld end - Specifies the buttweld end point with a green arrow on the nozzle generic
attachment.
Specify On-Screen - Enables you to specify the face end and buttweld end points on the nozzle
generic attachment on screen by the X, Y, and Z. These coordinates can also be entered
manually. Specifying the end and middle points sets those points for the routing point for the
next nozzle.
Remove Removes the existing xdata from the generic nozzle. Alternatively, you can use
ENGENERICREMOVE to remove data from any generic nozzle.
201
Misc Panel
9. Select a Flange Type from the list.
10. Select a layer from the Layer list, or leave the default.
11. Select a color from the Color list, or leave the default.
12. Click OK.
A red arrow indicates the end point. The start and end points can be re-specified after the
nozzle generic attachment is drawn.
displays.
displays.
Generic Attach
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Generic Attach
Misc toolbar: Generic Attach
Command line: GENERIC
Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information
later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a
component, use this routine to attach xdata information.
202
Misc Panel
Sort sequence - Specifies the sort sequence of the component in the bill of material.
Length - Specifies a length for the component.
Component type - Displays the type of the component.
Specification - Displays the specification used by the component.
Coordinates
World - Calculates pipe length based on the pipe component centerline. This option only affects
pipe, nipple, flanged pipe, and tubing components. It does not affect fixed-size components such
as elbows or flanges. If a pipe component is stretched, trimmed, or broken, the positions of the
components are automatically updated along with the pipe length.
Iso - Specifies the value of Length as the pipe length. The length does not change the drawing
graphics, but appears in the bill of material. For more information, see ISO Flag (on page 210).
Miscellaneous
Existing - Specifies that the component is not included in the bill of material. The component
symbol is also moved to the Exist layer. In ISOGEN isometric drawings, the component is
shown as dotted and dimensioned.
Insulation or CAESAR II - Specifies that this component either has CAESAR II pipe stress
analysis information or insulation attached.
BOM Item Type
Fabrication - Specifies a fabrication type of bill of material item.
Erection - Specifies an erection type of bill of material item.
Offshore - Specifies an offshore type of bill of material item.
Misc - Specifies a miscellaneous type of bill of material item.
The selected item type appears on the bill of materials when the FLAG column is added
using Pipe BOM / DB > Setup . For ISOGEN, you must also sort by the FLAG column to
group by type. For more information, see Bill of Material Setup (on page 154) and BOM Sort
Order / Accumulation Dialog Box (on page 157).
If Misc is selected when using ISOGEN, then ISOGEN treats the weld gap as a field-fit weld.
Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase the cut piece add-on allowances for field-fit
welds.
ISOGEN - Specifies data for the component in an ISOGEN drawing. Opens the ISOGEN Data
dialog box.
ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 73)
Custom Data - Specifies custom data created in the Specification Editor and enables you to edit
the value. This data can be isolated in the Line View palette.
For more information on creating custom data, see New Field Dialog Box in the CADWorx
Spec Editor Users Guide.
Click the link for more information on the Component Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 78).
203
Misc Panel
Remove - Removes CADWorx database attributes from a component, converting it to generic
AutoCAD geometry.
Many commands in CADWorx use xdata in the components and do not function if the
data is removed.
BOM/CG Point - Displays the Get BOM/CG Location dialog box, which enables you to specify
the bill of material location and the center of gravity location.
Attach - Saves modifications and closes the dialog box.
Cancel - Cancels the operation without saving modifications, and closes the dialog box.
204
Misc Panel
4. Type a complete description, such as PUMP, INGERSOLL-RAND, MODEL HOC, 2X1X8, in
the Long annotation box.
5. Type a line number in the Line number box, if you want to assign a line number to the
component.
6. Type the tag in the Tag box.
7. Type the code in the Code box, if you want to assign a code to the component.
8. Type the weight of the component in the Weight box.
9. Type the sort sequence number for the bill of material schedule location in the Sort
sequence box.
10. Type the length of the component in the Length box.
11. Change the Coordinates if available and needed.
12. Select Existing in the Miscellaneous column, if needed.
13. Change the BOM Item Type, if needed.
14. Click Attach.
15. Select the object to attach the information.
The software attaches the information to the object, and a red arrow displays indicating the
BOM Mark Point.
16. Press ENTER.
205
Misc Panel
System In
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > System In
Plant menu: Accessory > CAESAR II > System In
Command line: C2IN
Reads a CAESAR II input file. You must select the necessary ._A or .C2 file. This is the input file
created by CAESAR II or the output facility in CADWorx. After you select the input file, a dialog
box indicating that the file was read displays.
Make sure that the CAESARIIVersion (on page 36) startup variable is set to match your
CAESAR II installation. If this variable is set to 3.2, and the C2IN command is issued on a file
created or modified with CAESAR II 4.40, then an error message displays indicating that the
valid file is corrupt.
The next prompt requires that a specification be set. Although, there might be an existing
specification set, confirmation or a new specification is required. The specification might not be
used. The input facility in CADWorx attempts to determine the proper specification for the
component being input from data in the CAESAR II input file. The input facility or the data in the
input file does not always indicate a specification. Therefore, a default specification needs to be
set for these components.
Caesar - Derives the descriptive information within any new components from the material
passed back from CAESAR II and the name of the purposed component located in the
PRGM.TBL file. This file is located in the [Product Folder]\Plant\System folder. The system
automatically assigns all the required paths for data files which might be used later for
reconstruction (such as mode conversion). If the material was not supplied in CAESAR II, then
this option uses the description from the specification but does not populate the line number.
Environment - Assigns the component information based on the default specification. It also
assigns a line number if there is a current line numbering system setup. You are responsible for
the correct line number being set before importing. This option overrides any material sent from
CAESAR II. For example, if A-133-B material type was chosen in CAESAR II, and the default
specification above dictated A-106-B as the material type, this option would override the A-333B grade and place A-106-B in the component. The full description would be from the default
specification set above.
You must set the LanguageFile to the regional language when using a language-specific
specification. For example, if you have Chinese characters in your specification, set the
LanguageFile to Chinese_Simplified.dic. If you do not, System Out (on page 198) and
System In (on page 206) do not function correctly. For more information, see LanguageFile (on
page 38).
206
Misc Panel
Change Elevation
CADWorx Plant I tab: Misc > Change Elevation
Command line: CHANGEELEVATION
Changes the elevation of a selected pipe in the drawing.
Pick - Enables you to select the location for the change in the elevation.
BOP - Changes the elevation location to the bottom of pipe after specifying the elevation
change.
TOP - Changes the elevation location to the top of pipe after specifying the elevation
change.
Current - Keeps the center of the pipe as the current location after specifying the elevation
change.
207
Misc Panel
Dim Adjustment
Pipe menu:
Utility
Dim Adjustment
Options
Dimension - Adjusts the pipe to match an existing dimension. Select the dimension, then select
the pipes centerline.
Pipe - Adjusts the dimension to match the stored length in the pipes xdata.
208
Misc Panel
Line - Adjusts the pipe distance to match the length of a line that you select. AutoCAD
dimension lines stop at the back of the arrow, so they are not typically a good choice for this
option.
Pick reference points - Adjusts the pipe distance based on two reference points that you
select. This is the most commonly used option and can be used to pick each end of a pipe.
For this option, the following prompts requests the selection of the pipe(s) that were adjusted.
Selection can be made by crossing, window or individually selecting the centerlines. Other
components which might have been selected with crossing or window are simply ignored. This
only detects adjusted pipe.
Elbow Centerline
Plant menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Elbow Center Line
Command line: ELBOWCL
Turns on or off elbow centerlines for use with isometrics. When toggled on, it provides square
elbow centerlines which can be used for dimensioning. This also produces attractive isometrics.
209
Misc Panel
ISO Flag
Plant menu: Utility > ISO Flag
Command line: ISOFLAG
Sets a flag in the component indicating that the present stored length should be used regardless
of what type of length modifications are made to the pipe component. This command only
affects pipes and nipples. This is useful when adjusting a pipe which is to be used in an
isometric. For example, if you use this command before stretching a pipe which was 120'-0" long
to 5'-0" long, the Bill of Material generator reflects a 120'-0" long piece of pipe.
The components xdata is flagged when using the CEDIT dialog box.
System Visibility
Command line: SYSVIS
Turns on or off visibility of components usually located on the system layer. The command
affects the components listed below.
210
Weld gaps
Pads / Saddles
Bolts
Gaskets
TAPs
SECTION 9
2D Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D
Command Name
Command Line
2DREP
2DREPH
VIEWBOX
Edit - Edits a views box. For more information, see Edit (on
page 213).
VIEWEDIT
Zoom Lock - Allows zooming in paper space only. For more ZOOMLOCK
information, see Zoom Lock (on page 214).
Zoom Factors - Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. For
more information, see Zoom Factors (on page 214).
ZOOMF
2D Representation
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation
Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation
Command line: 2DREP EQUIP2DREP
Creates a two-dimension representation from a three-dimensional model. This command
removes hidden lines and retains layer and color information. It can work in model or paper
space. In model space, the 2D representation is created as a block.
An alternate command, 2DREPH (EQUIP2DREPH in CADWorx Equipment), is also available.
This command exports the hidden lines from solids to the 2D representation. All other features
of this command are similar to the 2DREP command.
Solids - Generates 2D representations of native AutoCAD 3D solids.
Centerlines - Copies selected CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines to the 2D representation.
Lines - Copies selected AutoCAD 3dPolyline, Arc, Circle, Ellipse, Leader, Line, Polyline, Spline
and Helix to the 2D representation. This includes CADWorx Piping and Steel center lines.
This command only processes native AutoCAD solid and line entities that are typically
created by CADWorx. This command does not process any custom solid or line entities that are
created by other add-on AutoCAD applications.
211
2D Panel
Create a 2D representation
1. Type 2DREPEQUIP2DREP.
2. Select the objects to include in the 2D representation.
3. Select the filter option that meets your needs.
If you are in paper space, the software asks if you want the viewports to be turned off.
4. Type Yes to turn off the viewports, or type No to leave the viewports on.
This option is useful when there are changes made to the model and the 2D
representation needs to be updated. You can turn on the viewport again using the AutoCAD
Properties dialog box, and then run the command again.
2D Representation Hidden
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > 2D Representation Hidden
Plant Menu: Accessory > 2D Representation
Command line: 2DREPH
Creates a 2D representation with hidden lines. This command exports the hidden lines from
solids to the 2D representation. All other features of this command are similar to the 2DREP
command. For more information, see 2D Representation (on page 211).
Box
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Box
Command line: VIEWBOX
Displays the View Creation dialog box. This dialog box creates clipped views by defining a 3D
box. This command is useful in creating layout drawings in paper space.
View Creation Dialog Box
View set name - Specifies the overall set name for the views. Each view created is named
based on this name.
212
2D Panel
First corner point
Specify On-screen - Select a point in the model as the first corner point of the view box.
Selecting a point in the model automatically fills in values for the X, Y, and Z boxes.
X - Specifies the X-axis value for the view box.
Y - Specifies the Y-axis value for the view box.
Z - Specifies the Z-axis value for the view box. The Z-axis value must be different for the first
and second corner points.
Views
View Type - Indicates the orientation of the view.
Name - Specifies the view name. The default name is a combination of the View set name
value and the View Type. After you create the view set, the views display in the AutoCAD View
dialog box.
Available - Indicates whether the view is included in the set. Select the checkbox to include the
view. Clear the checkbox to exclude the view.
Select All - Selects all of the check boxes in the Available column.
Delete All - Deletes all of the AutoCAD views that were previously created with this view set,
and close the dialog box.
Set Current - Sets the AutoCAD window to the selected view.
Isolate Box - Hides all AutoCAD entities outside the view box. Entities that cross the boundaries
of the view box are not hidden.
Show All - Shows all of the entities in the drawing.
Edit
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Edit
Command line: VIEWEDIT
Edits the box created with the VIEWBOX command. Double-clicking an existing view box runs
this command. For more information, see Box (on page 212).
213
2D Panel
Zoom Lock
CADWorx Plant I tab: 2D > Zoom Lock
Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Lock
Settings toolbar:
Command line: ZOOMLOCK
Locks the AutoCAD ZOOM command to allow zooming in paper space only. This means that
while you are in paper space with the MSPACE command activated (the cursors are in the
Mview), you can zoom without resizing the model space viewport. Instead, this command
intercepts the ZOOM command and changes to paper space before zooming. When you are
finished zooming, the command returns the cursor and environment back to the Mview.
This command simplifies working on CADWorx isometrics.
Type ZOOMLOCK.
Paperspace zoom lock toggled on.
Type ZOOMLOCK.
Paperspace zoom lock toggled off.
Zoom Factors
Plant menu: Utility > Zoom Factors
Command line: ZOOMF
Zooms an Mview to a specified scale. This command zooms to a perfect scale for your current
Mview. If you use this command from model space (tilemode 1), it displays a warning that
tilemode has to be set to 0 (paper space). After selecting the scale from one of the menus, a
prompt displays requesting the center of the view.
214
SECTION 10
Bolt
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt
Command Name
Command Line
WELDTOTAL
STDBOLT
Auto Gasket
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Gasket
Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Gasket
Command line: AUTOGASKET
Places a gasket on flange sets, and valves.
Automatic - Places a gasket into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a gasket into the drawing manually.
This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 49).
215
Bolt
Automatic
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Automatic
Command line: AUTOBOLT
Assigns stud bolt sets with similar sizes and specifications to all gaskets within the current
selection set. Gaskets of different sizes and specifications are automatically handled.
Automatic - Places a bolt into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a bolt into the drawing manually.
When the Bolt Insertion rule is turned on and you place a flange in the drawing it
does not have a bolt until you place a flange or a valve on the other side. Only then is the bolt
automatically inserted into the drawing when necessary.
This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 49) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 51).
216
Bolt
Auto Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Auto Weld
Plant Menu: Utility > Drawing Control > Auto Weld
Command line: AUTOWELD
Places weld gaps on every end of any butt weld and socket weld component or only on every
end of any butt weld when the component is selected. Three different scenarios can occur when
the weld gaps are placed:
1. When a weld gap is automatically placed on the end of a butt weld or socket weld
component, do one of the following to place the next component:
2. When a component, such as a tee, is inserted into a pipe, and the weld gaps are placed at
each end of the tee, the weld gaps automatically break and cut back the pipe on both sides
of the tee. If one exists, the branch connection pipe is also broken.
3. When a component is placed against another component that cannot be cut back, a weld
gap must already exist. For example, if you are placing a flange against an elbow, the elbow
must have an existing weld gap. If not, the software places the flange against the elbow
without any gap. In this scenario, it is your responsibility to place a weld gap before placing
the flange.
Automatic - Places a weld gap into the drawing automatically.
Manual - Places a weld gap into the drawing manually.
This option can also be set with a piping rule. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 49) and Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 50).
Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For
more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on
page 70). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit
welds.
217
Bolt
3. Select the piping components where you want welds placed, and press ENTER when
finished.
4. Select branches to add welds, or press ENTER to finish.
5. Select a component to keep its position, or press ENTER to finish.
The software displays the number of welds added.
Weld Total
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Weld Total
Command line: WELDTOTAL
Counts weld gaps on a drawing for estimating purposes.
An example of the typical output is shown below. You can copy this information and paste it
into a text file or to a Microsoft Excel workbook.
Qty.
Spec.
Nominal
Actual
Thk.
Linear Lg.
A0
2.000
2.375
0.154
37.310
A0
3.000
3.500
0.216
43.980
14
A1
10.000
10.750
0.365
472.810
A1
14.000
14.000
0.375
43.980
150
A1
2.000
2.375
0.154
1119.190
The ability to export the drawing to a database using the DBFGEN or LIVEDB command
can also help manage weld gaps.
Setting BOM Item Type to Misc causes ISOGEN to process weld gaps as field fit welds. For
more information about the options on the Component Edit dialog box, see Local Edit (on
page 70). Use ISOGEN Option Switch 22 to increase cut piece add-on allowances for field fit
welds.
218
Bolt
2. Select the objects you want to have automatically counted, and then press ENTER.
The software displays a prompt showing the total number of welds in the drawing.
Standard
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Standard
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Standard
Command line: PLACEBOLT
Inserts stud bolt sets into the drawing environment for Bill of Materials extraction. You can insert
a stud bolt set anywhere in the drawing. However, stud bolt sets must be attached to a flange
set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. Size and specification must be set
accordingly.
If the bolt Weight equals 0.0 in the Stud Bolts data table, the software calculates the weight
using the Density value from the Material Table and the AutoCAD solid volume of the whole
set of bolts.
If the bolt Weight is greater than 0.0 for flange-to-flange components, then the software assigns
the weight to the bolt set without performing any other calculations. However, when there is a
component between the flanges, such as a bleed ring, the software uses the Density and solid
volume calculation.
This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules
(on page 49) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 51). If you need to change the bolt set by
the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.
Non Standard
CADWorx Plant I tab: Bolt > Non Standard
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Non Standard
Command line: NONSTDBOLT
Inserts a stud bolt set anywhere. However, nonstandard bolt sets must be attached to a flange
set or flange valve set to be placed on the model. You can also insert special bolts. Size and
specification must be set accordingly.
This option is set when the bolt piping rule is set. For more information, see Piping Rules
(on page 49) and Apply Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 51). If you need to change the bolt set by
the bolt piping rule, delete the bolt placed and place a bolt using this option.
219
Bolt
2. Type the required text. For example, you can type NON STD STUD BOLTS.
3. Type the required description. For example, you can type STUD BOLTS W/ DOUBLE
NUTS & WASHERS.
4. Type the stud diameter. You must enter the value as a real number, such as 5/8".
5. Type the length. You must enter a real number, such as 7.25 or 7-1/4".
6. Type the required stud value.
7. Type the required weight.
8. Type a string, a real number, or press ENTER to accept the default.
9. Type the value, or press ENTER to accept the default.
10. Select a point in the drawing.
11. Use the compass to pick a direction in the drawing, and click to finish.
The bolt is placed in the drawing.
220
SECTION 11
RT Panel
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT
Command Name
Auto Route - Provides the ability to draw components
continuously without selecting them from the toolbar or
palette. For more information, see Auto Route (on page
221).
Command Line
AUTOROUTE, ROUTE
ROUTEBWSE
ROUTETRHD
ROUTESW
Auto Route
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Auto Route
Command Line: AUTOROUTE, ROUTE
You can also use the PIPW command to start routing pipe.
Starts the ROUTE in the X-Y plane as needed. This command can be used to route pipe from
one component to another without accessing the pipe, or elbow commands. The command is
best used to start a new route of pipe, but it also works to continue routing a previous section of
pipe. However, the most useful way to continue routing pipe is to use the + sign on the ends and
middle of the pipe. For more information on continuing routing, see Continue Routing (on page
223).
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
component List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing. All
components available display in the list based on the main size you have set.
221
RT Panel
Slope - Starts the pipe in a slope direction.
Meter - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on meters.
Foot - Places the slope rise or drop in the degrees entered based on feet.
Rise - Places the slope rise or drop based on the degrees entered.
sKew - Places the pipe at a skewed angle and allows you to continue piping. To finish or end
the running of skewed piping, you must press ENTER. sKew works in conjunction with the
Apply Skew Pipe Maximum Angle rule. CADWorx does not allow the piping to be placed at a
greater angle then set in the piping rule. For more information on the rule, see Apply Skew Pipe
Maximum Angle (on page 55).
component List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing at the
skewed point.
Plane - Starts the component in the XYZ plane plotting based on the UCS. Type P on
the command line, and then press ENTER to reorient the compass direction.
Undo - Takes you back to the previous step in your process.
Elevation - Starts the pipe perpendicular to the plane for routing.
Plane - Starts the component in the XYZ plane plotting based on the UCS. Type P on the
command line and press ENTER to reorient the compass direction.
Reference - Starts the line at a distance based on the reference point chosen.
Fitting mode - Starts the pipe as Buttweld, Socket Weld, Threaded, Flanged, or Special
Endtype fitting mode, depending on your selection.
elBow type - Enables you to select the elbow types based on the fitting mode you have
selected. For instance, with Buttweld the list would be Long Radius Buttweld, Short Radius
Buttweld, or Miter Elbow Buttweld. However, for Socket Weld the list would be Elbow
Socket Weld and Miter Elbow Socket Weld. You can change the fitting mode of the router in
the CADWorx Spec View palette. For more information, see Draw pipe components (on page
89).
Undo - Undoes the last piece of routed pipe.
Connect - Connects to a component or other piece of pipe.
Components - Displays all possible connecting directions to the component or pipe
using an image of piping.
Lines - Displays specific lines in a box form for connecting to the component or pipe.
Toggle length - Toggles the dimension of the pipe from the start point.
Alignment - Starts the pipe at a chosen alignment.
Center - Center of pipe
BOP - Bottom of pipe
TOP - Top of pipe
Left - Left of pipe
Right - Right of pipe
TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
222
RT Panel
Continue Routing
This procedure does not require a command to start. However, the ROUTE command used to
start new piping, can also be used to continue routing pipe.
The options below display when selecting the middle grip point on a pipe to insert a
component in an already routed piece of piping. If you select the grip point at the end of a piping
run the run just continues as a normal pipe with the options listed in Auto Route (on page 221).
List - Displays a list of available components to place in the drawing.
poinT distance - Enables you to specify a point on the pipe or component to move the selected
component.
Component distance - Displays the distance from the selected component to the selected
piping or component. The distance measured to a specifically selected component can be
changed by using Point.
Point - Enables you to change the distance from the selected component to another
component on the same linear pipe.
Pipe end point distance - Displays the distance measurement from the selected component to
the end of the pipe. Repeating the command changes the direction of the measurement to the
opposite end of the piping, where it connects to the next component.
insertion Justification - Changes the justification of a selected component from the end of the
piping. Justification for the component is left, right, or center. Use the Pipe end point distance
option by typing P on the command line, which enables you to change the justification from
either end of the piping.
Change connection - Enables you to change the direction of a component. This option is only
available on certain components when using the List or component List option.
Turning on Auto Connect (on page 174) allows you to continue routing from your last point
without having to click the grip point or without pressing ENTER. Turn off Auto Connect to
start from a different point, or to start a new point in the drawing.
You can move components by typing MOVECOMPONENT on the command line. The above
options, as well as the TAB key, are available with the MOVECOMPONENT command. You
can move more than one component at a time with MOVECOMPONENT. You can also
move components around to the other side of an elbow.
TAB key - Allows components to jump over other components in the piping after they
have been selected using the MOVECOMPONENT command.
Piping can be moved and lengthened by using the MOVELINE command. For more
information, see Moveline (on page 225).
223
RT Panel
Route from a grip point
1.
As you click, the pipe stops at that point, and allows you to go in any other direction. Do not
click on the screen unless you want the pipe to stop.
You can change a tee to a cross by selecting the plus grip point
opposite side of the branch.
You can add a pipe branch or nipple to a reducer with the plus grip point
to continue routing.
224
RT Panel
7. To skew a pipe, type K or SKEW on the command line, and then press ENTER.
The skewed piping options display on the command line. For more information, see Auto
Route (on page 221).
Turn off the AutoCAD ORTHO Mode in order for the piping to move in a 360 degree
direction.
8. Click the end point of the pipe to place the skewed piping.
The software inserts the skewed pipe in the drawing.
You cannot skew pipe larger than the angle set in the Apply Skew Pipe Maximum
Angle rule. If you do, the following message displays: The skew pipe does not allow an angle
bigger than the maximum value of 15.0000...
Moveline
Enables you to move, lengthen, or change the elevation of the piping in the plane.
Elevation - Enables you to move the elevation of the piping.
Pick - Select the elevation point in the drawing to place the piping.
BOP - Places the piping in the elevation based on the Bottom of Pipe.
TOP - Places the piping in the elevation based on the Top of Pipe.
display.
Router
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Router
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Router
Command line: ROUTER
Draws a 3D polyline for the previous welded, threaded, and socket automatic routing routines.
If you are using known 3D points, the UCS must be at the world position: Type UCS on the
command line, and press ENTER.
Unlike a normal 3D polyline, the elevation must be controlled with the Elevation option of
the Router
command or the UCS position.
225
RT Panel
Slope - Specifies the known slope or drop per foot to the next point in degrees (positive or
negative). Alternatively, use one of the options listed below to define the slope. This option does
not take effect until the next point is selected. For example, select the Slope option and then
select the next point of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.
Drop - Defines the drop to the next point as a real number, such as 1'-8
Rise - Defines the rise to the next point as a real number, such as 2'-9.
Position - Starts the 3D polyline at an elevated position. This option does not take effect until
the next point is selected. For example, select the Position option and then select the next point
of the 3D polyline for a change to the new position.
Nominal - Determine the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.
Size - Determines the present size used by the BOP or TOP option.
BOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size upward.
TOP - Draws the 3D polyline one-half the present set size downward.
Centerline - Default when starting this routine. You can change to the bottom of pipe BOP
option, then change back with this option.
Reference - Starts the line at a given distance from a reference point. After you provide this
reference point, you must provide relative/polar coordinates with an @ location.
Elevation - Changes the elevation in conjunction with the present UCS coordinate system. The
elevation change can be expressed using a positive or a negative number.
Pick - Establishes the working elevation based on a point selected in the drawing. You can
use object snap, if necessary.
Undo - Removes the last 3D polyline segment, and prompts you to enter the next point.
Specify next point - Selects the next point along the 3D polyline segment. Press ENTER to end
the selection.
Router commands
The CADWorx Plant auto route commands listed below provide a quick and effective way of
drawing pipe. You can draw long radius, short radius, threaded, or socket weld pipe.
226
RT Panel
Buttweld LR
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld LR
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld LR
Command line: ROUTEBWLR
Draws a long radius pipe.
Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run.
Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to
select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place,
followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are
drawn along each construction point.
The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not
polylines.
Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides
rolling offsets.
For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 225).
Buttweld SR
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Buttweld SR
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Buttweld SR
Command line: ROUTEBWSR
Draws a short radius pipe.
Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run.
Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to
select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place,
followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are
drawn along each construction point.
The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not
polylines.
Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides
rolling offsets.
For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 225).
227
RT Panel
Threaded
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Threaded
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Threaded
Command line: ROUTETHRD
Draws threaded pipe.
Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run.
Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to
select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place,
followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are
drawn along each construction point.
The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not
polylines.
Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides
rolling offsets.
For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 225).
Socket Weld
CADWorx Plant I tab: RT > Socket Weld
Plant Menu: Accessory > Auto Route > Socket Weld
Command line: ROUTESW
Draws socket weld pipe.
Elbows only - Draws only elbows on a particular pipe run.
Pick points - Draws pipe and elbows on a particular pipe run. The software first prompts you to
select a starting point. Afterwards, you select a location point for each elbow you want to place,
followed by an ending location. Press ENTER to finish the command. Pipe and elbows are
drawn along each construction point.
The Elbows only and Pick points options allow you to select location points only, not
polylines.
Select polyline - Builds pipe and elbows based on polyline selection. This option also provides
rolling offsets.
For information on 3D polyline construction, see Router (on page 225).
228
SECTION 12
Dimension Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions
Command Name
Command Line
AUTODIM
DIMH
DIMV
Set - Sets the elevation. For more information, see Set (on
page 231).
ELEV
DIMR
DIMTAILH
DIMTAILV
ANOTCOMP
ANOTELEV
DIMCOORD
TICK
TEXTHEIGHT
229
Dimension Panel
Automatic
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Automatic
Plant menu: Dimension > Automatic
Command line: AUTODIM
Automatically creates dimensions for a set of components that you select. Options to set the
offset distance and whether to include flanges are also provided.
Options
Flange - Dimensions flange faces. You specify whether flange dimensioning is turned On or
Off.
Offset - Specifies the distance from the dimension line to the component.
Selection - Starts the dimensioning process.
2. Type S on the command line, and press ENTER to select objects to dimension.
3. Select the objects to dimension. Press ENTER when you are finished.
4. Select the centroid for the dimensions. For example, if you selected two pieces of parallel
pipe with elbows attached to each end to dimension, and then selected a point between the
two pieces of pipe, the software would place the dimension lines to the outside.
The software displays the dimensions.
If you try to place automatic dimensions on two pieces of parallel pipe with no elbows, an
error code displays. Combined components must have at least one turn.
Horizontal
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Horizontal
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Horizontal
Command line: DIMH
Places horizontal dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the
sequence, you must type D for dimension line.
230
Dimension Panel
Vertical
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Vertical
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Vertical
Command line: DIMV
Places vertical dimensions. You are prompted for the points to dimension. To end the sequence,
you must type D for dimension line.
Set
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Set
Pipe menu: Utility > Elevation > Set
Command line: ELEV
Places piping at a preset elevation. This is the standard AutoCAD Elev command. When using
this option, remember to place the elevation back to 0'-0" for the proper elevation placement of
all future components. Use this command with caution. An alternative is to use the Flat (on page
267)
command built into CADWorx (VIEWFLAT).
Refer to the AutoCAD documentation for complete details regarding this command (ELEV).
231
Dimension Panel
Rotated
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Rotated
Plant menu: Dimension > Multiple > Rotated
Command line: DIMR
Places rotated dimensions. You are prompted for the angle of rotation and the points to
dimension. To end the sequence, you must type D for dimension line.
2. Type the dimension angle, or select two points to indicate the angle.
3. Select the origin location for the first extension line.
4. Select the origin location for the second extension line.
The software continues to prompt you for extension lines.
5. Type D on the command line, and press ENTER to end the sequence.
6. Select a location for the dimension line.
7. Press ENTER, or type a new value for the dimension.
The software displays the dimension.
232
Dimension Panel
Change
CADWorx Plant II: Dimensions > Change
Command line: CHANGELEV
Moves all selected entities (blocks, lines, polylines and so on) to a new elevation in reference
with the world coordinate system. You can also change a component elevation to 1/2 its actual
outside diameter.
Arbitrary - Places the component anywhere in the drawing.
BOP Correction - Aligns the pipe bottom with the center of the connected piece.
233
Dimension Panel
Component
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Component
Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Component
Command line: ANOTCOMP
Places component annotation.
Options
Tag - Annotates the component with its tag.
Long - Annotate the component with its long description and appends the size to the front.
Short - Annotates the component with its short description and appends the size to the front.
Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more
information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.
Leader - Adds a leader to the text.
Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.
Elevation
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Elevation
Plant menu: Text > Annotate > Elevation
Command line: ANOTELEV
Places component elevation annotation.
Options
BOP - Labels the bottom of the pipe elevation.
TOP - Labels the top of the pipe elevation.
Centerline - Labels the centerline elevation.
Justify - Allows five different justifications according to the AutoCAD standards. For more
information please refer to the AutoCAD documentation.
Leader - Adds a leader to the text.
Start point - Specifies the starting point for the text.
234
Dimension Panel
Coordinates
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Coordinates
Plant menu: Dimension > Coordinates
Command line: DIMCOORD
Places coordinates in either a user coordinate system or a world coordinate system. You can
place the text at the coordinate with or without a leader.
TEXTSIZE is controlled by DIMSCALE and DIMTXT.
Options
Leader - Places a leader.
Other point - Places the dimension text in an alternate location without a leader.
Same point - Places the dimension text at the same location which is picked without a leader.
Centerline - Places the dimension text either with a north or east designation. This option labels
a vertical dimension as east and a horizontal dimension as north.
The following AutoCAD setvars affect the dimensioning routines: DIMALT, DIMALTD,
DIMALTF, DIMASZ, DIMBLK, DIMEXE, DIMEXO, DIMLFAC, DIMTXT, DIMZIN, DIMSCALE,
LUNITS, LUPREC, and UNITMODE.
Place coordinates
1. Click Coordinates
ENTER.
2. If necessary, press ENTER, or type Y on the command line and press ENTER, to change to
the world coordinate system.
3. Select an extension line point.
4. Select an option.
5. Follow the prompts to place the coordinates.
The coordinates display.
235
Dimension Panel
Tick Mark
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dimensions > Tick Mark
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Tick Mark
Command line: TICK
Shows which side of the dimension extension line the gasket is on.
This command is dependent upon the DIMSCALE being set properly. For example; if the gasket
thickness was set to 1/8" and the scale of the drawing was set to full, the distance from the
extension line to the tick mark would be 1/8". If the scale of the drawing was set to 3/4"=1'-0",
the distance from the tick mark to the extension line would be 3/8". This insures that the tick
mark is visible on a plotted drawing.
The initial prompt allows you to set the thickness, but does not appear again during the single
drawing session. Changing the thickness is allowed in the next prompt.
ISO Text
Plant menu: Text > ISO Text
Creates 0, 30, and 330 oblique angled text in paper space when working with isometrics. These
commands are similar to the AutoCAD DTEXT command.
Height
Plant menu: Text > Height
Command line: TEXTHEIGHT
Changes the height of selected text by matching it with other text. This is useful when you are
zoomed to an unknown factor in paper space.
Options
Entire drawing - Chooses all text on the drawing.
Layer - Specifies a layer for selection. CADWorxs default text layer is TEXT.
Selection - Matches the height of text that you select.
236
SECTION 13
Command Line
SECTIONS
Detail - Opens the Details dialog box in which you can select DETAILS
a detail graphic to place on the drawing. For more information,
see Detail (on page 242).
Plan - Opens the Plan dialog box in which you can select a
plan graphic to place on the drawing. For more information,
see Plan (on page 243).
PLANS
INSTRUMENTS
Elevation - Opens the Elevations box in which you can select ELEVATIONS
an elevation graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Elevation (on page 245).
Arrow - Opens the Arrows dialog box in which you can select ARROWS
an arrow head graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Arrow (on page 246).
Weld - Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box in which you
select a weld symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see Weld (on page 247).
WELDS
ISO - Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box in which you ISOS
can select an ISO symbol graphic to place on the drawing. For
more information, see ISO (on page 248).
Dots - Opens the Dots dialog box in which you can select a
weld dots graphic to place on the drawing. For more
information, see Dots (on page 250).
DOTS
MISC
ENDFLG
237
ENDPIPE
FITTINGWIDTH
LINEWIDTH
Each of the Graphics commands opens a related dialog box, which is used to preview and
select a graphic for placement in the drawing. A drawing file is used to display the preview
graphic in the dialog box. These graphic drawing files are delivered to the [Product
Folder]\Support folder. They can be modified to meet your specific project requirements.
A modified graphic drawing file must contain the same number of attributes as are
currently in the drawing.
Head
Head w/ Attrib
Head w/ 2 Attrib
End w/ Attrib
graph1 s1 1
graph1 s2 2
graph1 s3 3
graph1 s4 4
Columns must start at positions 1, 40, and 75 and define the information outlined below.
238
COL1 (Position 1) - Drawing used in the dialog box for preview image.
COL2 (Position 40) - Name displayed in the dialog box for graphic name.
COL3 (Position 75) - Function used to draw the graphic in the drawing with
arguments.
If the columns are not at the required positions, the drawing function fails.
There must be a blank line at the beginning and at the end of a section.
The scale of the graphics inserted into the drawing, excluding isometric symbol graphics, is
based upon the value of the AutoCAD setvar DIMSCALE. If DIMSCALE is set to 0, as is
required for paper space, the software inserts graphics at a scale of 1. Isometric symbol
graphics are inserted at a scale of 1 regardless of the DIMSCALE setting.
System Prompts
The system prompts required to draw the graphic types delivered with the software are outlined
in the table below.
Function
System Response
Prompt 1
Prompt 2
Prompt 3
Prompt 4
Prompt 5
Prompt 6
Prompt 7
Prompt 8
Prompt 9
Prompt 10
239
System Response
Prompt 11
Prompt 12
Prompt 13
Prompt 14
Prompt 15
Pick insertion point: pick a point in the drawing (not center insertion, outside edge)
Pick direction: pick a direction in the drawing
Enter mark: type a string on the command line, and press ENTER (ex: 101)Weld
Prompt 16
Prompt 17
Prompt 18
Prompt 19
Prompt 20
Section
CADWorx Plant II tab: Section
Pipe menu: Graphics > Section
Command line: SECTIONS
Opens the Sections dialog box, which allows you to select a section graphic for placement in
the drawing.
240
Function Name
Head
S1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
S2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
S3S.dwg
Prompt 3
End w/ Attrib
S4S.dwg
Prompt 4
End w 2Attrib
S5S.dwg
Prompt 5
End
S6S.dwg
Prompt 6
Middle
S7S.dwg
Prompt 6
241
Detail
CADWorx Plant II tab: Detail
Pipe menu: Graphics > Details
Command line: DETAILS
Opens the Details dialog box, which allows you to select a detail graphic for placement in the
drawing.
Function Name
Head
D1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
D2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
D3S.dwg
Prompt 3
Mark w/ Attrib
D4S.dwg
Prompt 7
Mark w 2Attrib
D5S.dwg
Prompt 8
. Alternatively, type Details on the command line and then press ENTER.
242
Plan
CADWorx Plant II tab: Plan
Pipe menu: Graphics > Plans
Command line: PLANS
Opens the Plans dialog box, which allows you to select a plan graphic for placement in the
drawing.
Function Name
Head
P1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
P2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
P3S.dwg
Prompt 3
. Alternatively, type PLANS on the command line and then press ENTER.
243
Instrument
CADWorx Plant II tab: Instrument
Pipe menu: Graphics > Instruments
Command line: INSTRUMENTS
Opens the Instruments dialog box, which allows you to select an instrument graphic for
placement in the drawing.
Function Name
2 Attrib Local
F1S.dwg
Prompt 10
3 Attrib Local
F2S.dwg
Prompt 11
2 Attrib Board
F3S.dwg
Prompt 12
244
Elevation
CADWorx Plant II tab: Elevation
Pipe menu: Graphics > Elevations
Command line: ELEVATIONS
Opens the Elevations dialog box, which allows you to select an elevation graphic for placement
in the drawing.
Function Name
Head
E1S.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
E2S.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
E3S.dwg
Prompt 3
Generic Head
L1S.dwg
Prompt 9
245
Arrow
CADWorx Plant II tab: Arrow
Pipe menu: Graphics > Arrows
Command line: ARROWS
Opens the Arrows dialog box, which allows you to select an arrow head graphic for placement
in the drawing.
Function Name
North
N1S.dwg
Prompt 14
Prevailing
N2S.dwg
Prompt 12
N3S.dwg
Prompt 12
N4S.dwg
Prompt 14
Small
A1S.dwg
Prompt 12
Medium
A2S.dwg
Prompt 12
Large
A3S.dwg
Prompt 12
246
Weld
CADWorx Plant II tab: Weld
Pipe menu: Graphics > Weld
Command line: WELDS
Opens the Weld Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select a weld symbol graphic for
placement in the drawing.
Function Name
Leader
W1X.dwg
Prompt 16
Fillet
W2X.dwg
Prompt 17
Weld Around
W3X.dwg
Prompt 18
Field Weld
W4X.dwg
Prompt 17
Back
W5X.dwg
Prompt 17
Square
W6X.dwg
Prompt 17
V Groove
W7X.dwg
Prompt 17
Bevel
W8X.dwg
Prompt 17
U Groove
W9X.dwg
Prompt 17
J Groove
W10X.dwg
Prompt 17
V Flare
W11X.dwg
Prompt 17
Flare Bevel
W12X.dwg
Prompt 17
247
W14X.dwg
Prompt 17
Flush Large
W15X.dwg
Prompt 17
Convex Small
W16X.dwg
Prompt 17
Convex Medium
W17X.dwg
Prompt 17
Convex Large
W18X.dwg
Prompt 17
Backing
W19X.dwg
Prompt 19
Spacer
W20X.dwg
Prompt 19
Plug
W13X.dwg
Prompt 17
. Alternatively, type WELDS on the command line and then press ENTER.
ISO
CADWorx Plant II tab: ISO
Pipe menu: Graphics > ISO
Command line: ISOS
Opens the Isometric Symbols dialog box, which allows you to select an isometric symbol
graphic for placement in the drawing.
248
Function Name
Adjustable_Base_Ell.dwg
Prompt 20
Angle
Angle.dwg
Prompt 20
Arrow1
Arrow1.dwg
Prompt 20
Arrow2
Arrow2.dwg
Prompt 20
Arrow3
Arrow3.dwg
Prompt 20
Base Support
Base_Support.dwg
Prompt 20
Channel
Channel.dwg
Prompt 20
Column
Column.dwg
Prompt 20
Column_Knee_Brace.dwg
Prompt 20
DummyLeg
DummyLeg.dwg
Prompt 20
Floorwall Penetration
Floorwall_Penetration.dwg
Prompt 20
Grating Penetration1
Grating_Penetration_1.dwg
Prompt 20
Grating Penetration2
Grating_Penetration_2.dwg
Prompt 20
Grating Penetration3
Grating_Penetration_3.dwg
Prompt 20
Hanger Clamp
Hanger_Clamp.dwg
Prompt 20
Hanger Clamp 1
Hanger_Clamp_2.dwg
Prompt 20
Hanger Clevis
Hanger_Clevis.dwg
Prompt 20
Hanger Clevis 1
Hanger_Clevis_1.dwg
Prompt 20
Insulation Saddle
Insulation_Saddle.dwg
Prompt 20
Knee Brace
Knee_Brace.dwg
Prompt 20
Pipe Clamp
Pipe_Clamp.dwg
Prompt 20
249
Pipe_Shoe_Extrude.dwg
Prompt 20
Pipe_Shoe_Faced.dwg
Prompt 20
Spring_Hanger_Clamp.dwg
Prompt 20
T Support
T_Support.dwg
Prompt 20
Ubolt
Ubolt.dwg
Prompt 20
Ubolt 1
Ubolt_2.dwg
Prompt 20
WFlange_Beam.dwg
Prompt 20
. Alternatively, type ISOS on the command line and then press ENTER.
Dots
CADWorx Plant II tab: Dots
Pipe menu: Graphics > Dots
Command line: DOTS
Opens the Dots dialog box, which allows you to select a weld dot graphic for placement in the
drawing.
250
Function Name
Head
S1.dwg
Prompt 1
Head w/ Attrib
S2.dwg
Prompt 2
Head w/ 2Attrib
S3.dwg
Prompt 3
End w/ Attrib
S4.dwg
Prompt 4
End w 2Attrib
S5.dwg
End
S6.dwg
Prompt 6
Middle
S7.dwg
Prompt 6
Prompt 5
. Alternatively, type DOTS on the command line and then press ENTER.
Misc
CADWorx Plant II tab: Misc
Pipe menu: Graphics > Misc
Command line: MISC
Opens the Miscellaneous dialog box, which allows you to select a graphic for placement in the
drawing.
251
Function Name
Small Circle
M1S.dwg
Prompt 15
Small Hexagon
M2S.dwg
Prompt 15
Small Square
M3S.dwg
Prompt 15
Small Rev
M4S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Circle
M5S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Hexagon
M6S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Square
M7S.dwg
Prompt 15
Large Rev
M8S.dwg
Prompt 15
. Alternatively, type MISC on the command line and then press ENTER.
252
Flange O.D.
CADWorx Plant II tab: Flange O.D.
Pipe Ends toolbar: Flange O.D.
Command line: ENDFLG
Draws a circle around the diameter of the selected flange at the size and specification currently
defined for the drawing. The circle, which represents the end view of a flange, is placed at the
center of the selected point.
The resulting circle has centerlines that are on the default CL layer.
Plain End
CADWorx Plant II tab: Plain End
Pipe Ends toolbar: Plain End
Command line: ENDPLAIN
Draws a circle around the diameter of the selected pipe at the size and specification currently
defined for the drawing. The circle, which represents the end view of a pipe, is placed at the
center of the selected point.
Hidden End
CADWorx Plant II tab: Hidden End
Pipe Ends toolbar: Hidden End
Command line: ENDHIDDEN
Draws a circle around the diameter of the selected pipe at the size and specification currently
defined for the drawing. The circle, which represents the end view of a pipe, is drawn with a
hidden line type and placed at the center of the selected point.
253
Pipe End
CADWorx Plant II tab: Pipe End
Pipe Ends toolbar: Pipe End
Command line: ENDPIPE
Places a baseball at the center of the selected point. The size and the layer of the baseball are
determined by the current defined specification.
254
SECTION 14
Layers Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers
Command Name
Command Line
LAYERCHANGE
LAYERSET
LAYERDELETE
LAYEROFF
LAYERON
MATCH
Isolate Layer - Turns off all layers except for the layer
associated with an entity that you select. For more
information, see Isolate Layer (on page 258).
LAYERISOLATE
255
Layers Panel
Change Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Change Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Change
Command line: LAYERCHANGE
Changes an objects layer to the layer associated with another object that you select. You can
select the objects to change individually or with a fence.
Set Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Set Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Set
Command line: LAYERSET
Sets the current layer to that of an object that you select. You must select an individual object.
2. Select the objects whose layer you want to be the active layer.
The software sets the active layer to that of the selected object.
Delete Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Delete Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Delete
Command line: LAYERDELETE
Removes all of the entities on the layer associated with an entity that you select. For example,
you can delete all the entities, such as lines, text, and so on, on layer 0. You must select an
individual entity.
If you select the VIEWL layer, the software displays a warning message. Deleting the VIEWL
layer deletes a block named CPM which the software inserts when beginning a new drawing.
This block contains information (sizes, specification, and so on) that are used when opening an
existing drawing. If you delete this layer, this information is not available for the next drawing
session. You can re-enter this information.
256
Layers Panel
Delete a layer
1. Click Delete Layer
Layer Off
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer Off
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Off
Command line: LAYEROFF
Turns off the layer associated with an entity that you select. You must select an Individual entity.
Layer On
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Layer On
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > On
Command line: LAYERON
Turns a layer back on that was turned off with the Layer Off command. For more information,
see Layer Off (on page 257). No selection is required.
Click Layer On
Match Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Match Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Match
Command line: MATCH
Changes an objects layer to match that of another object that you select.
2. Select the objects whose layer you want to change. Press ENTER to end the selection.
3. Select an object on the layer that you want to match.
The software changes the layer of the objects.
257
Layers Panel
Isolate Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Isolate Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Isolate
Command line: LAYERISOLATE
Turns off all layers except for the layer associated with an entity that you select.
Un-Isolate Layer
CADWorx Plant II tab: Layers > Un-Isolate Layer
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Un-Isolate
Command line: LAYERUNISO
Turns all of the layers on. No selection is required.
Previous
Plant menu: Utility > Layer Control > Previous
Command line: LAYERRESTORE
Sets the current layer back to the previous layer when you have placed dimensioning or text.
This command is only available after these two items are placed. This command does not
restore a previous layer that has been changed with the Layer or Ddlmodes commands.
258
SECTION 15
Restraints Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints
The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.
Command Name
Command Line
TRANSLATIONAL
ANCHOR
SPRING
ROTATIONAL
SNUBBER
GUIDE
Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that
appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are
delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be redrawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the
restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.
The restraint is used in the bi-directional link with CAESAR II. The position of the restraint is
important for the evaluation of the stress model within CAESAR II. For example, you can
position a rotational restraint at any vector.
The CAESARIITolerance (on page 36) variable is useful when the bi-directional process
encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is
sloped.
All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides
to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on
page 73) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID,
SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these
SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to
the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.
You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.
259
Restraints Panel
Reinforcing Pad
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Pad
Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Pad
Command line: REINFPAD
Attaches a reinforcement pad to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement pad is
represented by the alpha-identifier P. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that is used in
Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
For information about showing reinforcement pads on an ISOGEN isometric drawing, see
Offset Tap (on page 125).
2. Select a component.
3. Select the branch pipe component.
4. Type the thickness of the reinforcement pad on the command line, and press ENTER.
5. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER.
6. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software places the reinforcement pad and notates the drawing with the reinforcing pad
alpha-identifier.
Reinforcing Saddle
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Reinforcing Saddle
Misc toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle
Command line: REINFSAD
Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement
saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that
is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
260
Restraints Panel
2. Select a component.
3. Select the branch run of the component.
4. Type the thickness of the reinforcement saddle on the command line, and press ENTER.
5. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER.
6. Type the required value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The software places the reinforcement saddle and notates the drawing with the reinforcing
saddle alpha-identifier.
Translational
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Translational
Restraints toolbar: Translational
Command line: TRANSLATIONAL
Creates a translational-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format.
261
Restraints Panel
Anchor
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Anchor
Restraints toolbar: Anchor
Command line: ANCHOR
Creates an anchor-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format.
Place an anchor
1. Click Anchor
Spring Hanger
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Spring Hanger
Restraints toolbar: Spring Hanger
Command line: SPRING
Creates a spring hanger-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format.
262
Restraints Panel
Rotational
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Rotational
Restraints toolbar: Rotational
Command line: ROTATIONAL
Creates a rotational-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format.
Click Rotational
on the Restraints panel.
Click where you want the restraint placed.
Select a direction in the drawing.
Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The restraint is placed in the drawing.
Snubber
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Snubber
Restraints toolbar: Snubber
Command line: SNUBBER
Creates a snubber-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format.
Place a snubber
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click Snubber
on the Restraints panel.
Click where you want the snubber placed.
Select a direction in the drawing.
Type a numerical value on the command line, and press ENTER.
The snubber is placed in the drawing.
263
Restraints Panel
Guide
CADWorx Plant II tab: Restraints > Guide
Restraints toolbar: Guide
Command line: GUIDE
Creates a guide-type restraint.
This type of restraint appears on the drawing in a symbolic format.
Place a guide
1. Click Guide
264
SECTION 16
UCS Panel
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS
Command Name
Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat
position. For more information, see Flat (on page 267).
Command Line
VIEWFLAT
Next - Places the current user coordinate system in the next UCSNEXT
position. For more information, see UCS Next (on page
268).
Compass - Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates
the Point and Shoot orientation. For more information, see
Compass (on page 268).
COMPASS
VIEWNORTH
VIEWSOUTH
East - Places the current user coordinate system in the east VIEWEAST
position. For more information, see East (on page 270).
West - Places the current user coordinate system in the
west position. For more information, see West (on page
269).
VIEWWEST
265
UCS Panel
If you cannot see the rubber band effect, or if it doesnt appear correctly, you are out of plane.
Pay attention to the icon as it shows where you are. If the broken pencil icon appears, and there
are strange lines on the screen instead of pipe and components, your current plane is
perpendicular to the viewpoint. Use the Undo command, or change the viewpoint.
When dimensioning or annotating an isometric or 3D model, place the UCS icon on a node or a
centerline on the run you are working on. The text has the same orientation as the icon.
Xtext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the X-axis. When you view a model from the bottom
side using a view point with a negative angle from the X-Y plane, text and dimension placement
is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the X-axis of the UCS to remedy this. Text
and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and plotting. If you change
from a negative to positive angle from the X-Y view point, you must replace the text for the
proper orientation.
Ztext - Rotates the UCS 180 degrees along the Z-axis. When viewing a model from the back
side using a view point with a 0 to 180 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the X axis, text and
dimension placement is upside down and backwards. This option rotates the Z-axis of the UCS
to remedy this. Text and dimensions are then placed in the proper orientation for viewing and
plotting. If you change to a rear view position (180 - 360 degree angle in the X-Y plane from the
X-axis), you must replace the text for the proper orientation.
Elevation - Sets the elevation to the present UCS. This command does not set the depth in a
North, South, East, or West plane. Setting an elevation of 10' (when the present elevation is 0')
raises the UCS to 10' regardless of the position.
Rotate - Rotates the present UCS around the X-, Y-, and Z-axes. For example, rotating the UCS
to 45 degrees after inserting a 45 degree elbow allows you to place other components in line
with the 45 degree elbow.
COordinate - Specifies an exact X, Y, Z-coordinate in relation to the WCS (world coordinate
system).
CLip - Clips the view at the present plane set by the UCS. This plane can be established with
the Point and Shoot UCS options or any three-point UCS position. The plane can be skewed at
any angle.
On - Turns on view clipping with clipping distances as set by the Back and Front options.
Off - Turns off view clipping.
Back - Sets the distance to the back of the clipping area. This value must be a negative number.
If this value is positive, it can clip past the front clipping area and leave nothing in the view.
Front - Sets the distance to the front of the clipping area. This value must be a positive number.
If this value is negative, it can clip past the back clipping area and leave nothing in the view.
The CLip option is also available as the command VIEWCLIP.
Pick point - Moves the 0,0,0 user base to a point you select. Press Enter to keep the UCS at
the same origin but switch to a new plane. For example, press Enter to change from the north
plate to a west plane.
266
UCS Panel
You must enter other UCS positions with AutoCADs UCS command. Two extremely useful
options in this command are the OBject and 3 Point. Leave the UCSICON on and set to origin
when using any method of rearranging the UCS.
If you select a point close to the screens edge, and the UCS icon is on and set to origin,
the icon may not remain at this point. AutoCAD requires that the whole icon be visible and
places the icon in the lower left corner of the screen. If this happens, zoom out a little or pan
toward the new UCS position.
Flat
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > Flat
UCS toolbar: Flat
Plant menu: UCS > Flat
Command line: VIEWFLAT
Places the current user coordinate system in the flat position.
267
UCS Panel
UCS Next
UCS toolbar: Next
Plant menu: UCS > UCS Next
Command line: UCSNEXT
Toggles through each of the Point and Shoot UCS positions.
Compass
UCS toolbar: Compass
UCS toolbar: Compass
Command line: COMPASS
Displays a compass-type symbol that indicates the Point and Shoot orientation. The symbol
displays at the point you select.
North
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > North
UCS toolbar: North
Plant menu: UCS > North
Command line: VIEWNORTH
Places the current user coordinate system in the north position.
268
UCS Panel
South
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > South
UCS toolbar: South
Plant menu: UCS > South
Command line: VIEWSOUTH
Places the current user coordinate system in the south position.
West
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > West
UCS toolbar: West
Plant menu: UCS > West
Command line: VIEWWEST
Places the current user coordinate system in the west position.
269
UCS Panel
East
CADWorx Plant II tab: UCS > East
UCS toolbar: East
Plant menu: UCS > East
Command line: VIEWEAST
Places the current user coordinate system in the east position.
UCS Object
UCS toolbar: UCS Object
Plant menu: UCS > UCS Object
Command line: UCS
Orients the UCS according to an object that you select. Please refer to the AutoCAD
documentation on the UCS (User Coordinate System) for more detail.
This command is useful for rearranging dimensions in the model space (MSPACE) of a
CADWorx isometric model. Run this command, and then select the dimension. The software
places the UCS according to the position of the dimension allowing it to be stretched and
moved.
270
SECTION 17
Command Line
Wide Flange
WSHAPE
Channel
CSHAPE
Angle
LSHAPE
Tee
TSHAPE
Pipe
PSHAPE
Tube
TSSHAPE
Flat Bar
FBSHAPE
Round Bar
RBSHAPE
CLIPSHAPE
LLIPSHAPE
ZSHAPE
Double Angle
2LSHAPE
Shapes
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab > Steel Shapes panel
Plant > Steel > Shapes
Command line: STEEL
Draws many different steel shapes in the drawing. When placing steel shapes, you can:
attach steel shapes to lines or you can specify the end points.
place members into the current UCS.
define the location of the centerline and the angle about the centerline.
place steel on arcs.
copy, stretch, or edit the size with the edit function.
271
272
273
First column has to be called "MEMBER". The member name cannot have two consecutive
spaces.
Required columns have to in the exact order listed for each type of steel shape to generate
the AutoCAD solid.
All columns after the required columns are optional. These optional columns display in the
Properties dialog box for reference. The Ix (Inertia about X-axis), Iy (Inertia about Y-axis),
and J (torsion) columns might be used by the SEXPORT command when export to CAESAR
II Steel (*.str) files.
The cross sectional area (AREA) and fillet radius (R) columns are required in the data file
but are not used by the software to generate the AutoCAD solid shape. These values are not
stored with the component.
274
Channel Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=C)
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
WEB_THK - Web Thickness
FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width
FLG_THK - Flange Thickness
R - Fillet Radius (not used)
X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)
275
Angle Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=L)
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
THK - Thickness
R - Fillet Radius (not used)
X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)
Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)
276
Tee Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=WT)
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
DEPTH - Depth
STEM_THK - Stem Thickness
FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width
FLG_THK - Flange Thickness
R - Fillet Radius (not used)
Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)
277
Pipe Shapes
Data file sample (Type=P)
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
OD - Outside Diameter
WALL_THK - Wall Thickness (not used)
278
Tube Shapes
Data file sample (Type=TS)
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
SIDE1 - Side 1 length
SIDE2 - Side 2 length
THK - Thickness
R - Fillet Radius (not used)
279
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
WIDTH - Width
THK - Thickness
280
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
OD - Outside Diameter
281
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
DEPTH - Web Thickness
THK - Thickness
FLG_WIDTH - Flange Width
LIP - Lip Length
X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)
282
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
THK - Thickness
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
LIP - Lip Length
X - Centroid location X axis (used only when SteelNeutralAxis = 0)
Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)
283
Z Shapes
Data file sample (TYPE=Z):
Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WEIGHT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
HEIGHT - Height
THK - Thickness
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LIP1 - Lip 1 length (optional)
LEG2 - Leg 2 length (optional)
LIP2 - Lip 2 length (optional)
THK_LEG1 - Leg 1 thickness (optional)
THK_LEG2 - Lip 1 thickness (optional)
THK_LIP1 - Leg 2 thickness (optional)
THK_LIP2 - Lip 2 thickness (optional)
284
Required Columns:
MEMBER - Member Name
WGT - Weight
AREA - Cross sectional Area (not used)
LEG1 - Leg 1 length
LEG2 - Leg 2 length
THK - Thickness
Y - Centroid location Y axis (used only when center line location is set to center)
285
286
SECTION 18
Command line
SBPLATE
BTSHAPE
SUSER
SLOFT
SFRAMEANOT
SLADDER
Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the
drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 309).
Hand Rail - Places hand rails in the drawing. For more
information, see Handrail (on page 312).
SHRAIL
SSTAIR
287
Plate
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Plate
Steel toolbar: Plate
Plant menu: Steel > Plate
Command line: SPLATE
Creates plates in the model using existing shapes or by specifying a minimum of three plate
corners. You define the extrusion direction after selecting the shape or defining the corners.
Use the SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 43) startup variable to define plate data files location.
The delivered libraries are Steel_I and Steel_M. Steel_I contains imperial unit data files using
inches while Steel_M contains metric data files. At the top of each data file is an entry that
defines the type of data file: metric or imperial. The software reads this entry in the data file and
determines if the units need to be converted. For example, when SystemMeasure (on page 45)
is set to 2 (metric system with nominal inch input) and you want to use an imperial data file from
Steel_I, the system automatically converts the data file values from inches into millimeters.
Select the data file to use using the SteelLibraryDirectory variable.
288
289
Base Plate
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Base Plate
Steel toolbar: Base Plate
Plant menu: Steel > Base Plate
Command line: SBPLATE
Places base plates in open space or attached to the end of a steel member. CADWorx
automatically copes the steel member with the base plate.
Details
Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate.
Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file.
Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in
the data file header.
290
Plate Dimensions
Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the
long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.
Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the
long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Hole Dimensions
On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate
without holes.
Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.
Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the
holes.
Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.
Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of
the holes.
Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.
Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.
Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from
the hole center.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.
291
Steel Bolts
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Steel Bolts
Command line: BTSHAPE
Draws bolts in the drawing. You can place bolt shapes on lines, or you can specify the end
points.
292
293
294
2. Select an existing component in the model that has the size that you want to use.
295
Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and the Center of Gravity Location
1. Double-click the entity.
The Generic Attach (Edit) dialog box displays.
2. Click Specify On-screen under BOM Mark Point.
3. Select a point on the object to specify the mark point.
A red arrow displays indicating the point.
4. Click Specify On-screen under CG Location.
5. Select a point on the object to specify the mark point.
A green arrow displays indicating the location.
6. Click OK.
User Shape
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > User Shape
Plant menu: Steel > User Shape
Command line: SUSER
Places a component using a custom user shape. You select the component to draw based on
the user shape DWG file that you previously created. The extrusion direction and distance is
based on points picked or line selected in the drawing. You can edit Roll angle along with the
standard annotations.
296
297
298
Loft
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Loft
Command line: SLOFT
Creates lofted steel components. You must have two cross sections and the path curve between
them defined in the drawing before using this command. The cross sections define the shape of
the resulting steel component. The path curve must intersect all planes of the cross sections.
1. Draw the two cross sections and the path curve in the drawing.
2. On the Steel Draw panel, click Loft
299
The palette can be resized, docked and hidden like any AutoCAD palette. The command
SLSSHOWPALETTE shows the palette if it is hidden. The column line between the field labels
and the settings can be moved left or right to resize the columns.
General Tab
300
Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another
drawing
Load Settings From File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any
existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.
Add Setting - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.
Delete Setting - Delete a named setting from the list.
Match Settings - Apply settings from one object to other objects.
Turn off Vertical symbols - Used to turn off vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis
objects.
Generate - Generate the steel member drawing objects in a viewport.
Set to Object - Apply new settings to a viewport or individual steel components already
drawn.
Update - Updates the existing objects to match changes made to the model
Reset Settings - Resets individual member objects back to the viewport settings and link
them back to the view port.
Archive drawings - Detaches all intelligence from the drawing objects. Underlying models
can be removed.
Turn of Vertical Symbols - Used to turn on vertically places symbols representing Z-Axis
objects previously turned off.
Settings List Box - Choose the named settings.
Line Settings
301
Tag Settings
Symbol Settings
302
Dimension Tab
303
Save Settings to File - Save your set of settings to an external file for use in another
drawing.
Load Settings from File - Load a saved set of settings from a file into the drawing. Any
existing named settings are lost when a new set is loaded from the file.
Add Named Style - Add a name to a set of settings you want to reuse.
Delete Named Style - Delete a named setting from the list.
Generate Plan Dimension - Generate the plan style dimensions of a selected viewport.
Generate Elevated Dimension - Generate the elevation style dimensions of a selected
viewport.
Clear Dimensions - Remove all dimensions of a selected viewport.
Update Dimensions - Update existing dimensions of a selected viewport.
Settings List Box - Used to choose the named settings.
Dimension Level - Select how many dimension levels to use.
Dimension Settings
304
Baseline Type
Continue Type
Ordinate Type
Tag Settings
305
306
307
Frame Annotation
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Frame Annotation
Plant menu: Steel > Frame > Annotation
Command line: SFRAMEANOT
Annotates and dimensions frame lines. This command can also create the dimensions in call
outs in paper space.
Dimensions only - Draws only the dimension for the selected frame line. You are prompted to
pick the dimension side. The distance the dimensions are offset from the frame line is controlled
by the AutoCAD setvar DIMDLI. This option respects the current DIMSCALE setting.
Call outs only - Creates the call out and places the label of the selected frame line in a block
with attribute. The M5 block located in the [Product Directory]\Support folder is used for the call
out. You are prompted to pick the call out location.
Both - This option creates both dimensions and call outs.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Frame Annotation
308
Ladder
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Ladder
Steel toolbar: Ladder
Plant menu: Steel > Ladder
Command line: SLADDER
Creates ladders by specifying the start and end points of the ladder and rotation angle of the
ladder. Click Browse to load a predefined ladder into the dialog box. Use Save As to save a
ladder configuration for use later.
Position Tab
Start point / End point - Defines the location of the ladder.
Specify On-screen - Select this option to specify the start and end ladder locations interactively
in the model. Clear this option to define the locations using the X, Y, and Z coordinate boxes.
Rotation angle - Defines the rotation angle for the entire ladder. Select Specify On-screen to
define the rotation interactively in the drawing. Clear the option to use the rotation value
specified in the Angle box.
Dimension Tab
Sloped ladder - Select to allow the ladder to be sloped. The slope is determined by the
difference between the X or Y start and end locations in the Position Tab.
Rail width - Enter the inside distance from rail to rail.
Above platform - Enter the distance the ladder rails (offset extension of rail) are to extend
above the top rung.
Rail top exit width - Enter the inside to inside distance of the ladder opening above the
platform.
Rung spacing - Enter the center to center distance of the ladder rungs.
Offset (+/-) - Enter the distance the ladder is offset from the platform.
Cage Tab
Cage ladder - Select to place a cage on the ladder if the height of the ladder is over the
minimum distance.
Curved - Select to connect the hoop bars to the ladder using a curved connection.
Max. hoop spacing - Enter the distance from center to center of the intermediate hoops.
Cage bar spacing - Enter the distance from the center to center of the vertical bars on the
cage.
Bottom hoop clearance - Enter the distance from the base elevation or grade to the bottom
hoop.
Distance to middle - Enter the distance from the ladder rungs to the center of the cage.
Small hoop radius - Enter the radius of the hoop bar at the ladder rail location. This box is
available only when Curved is selected.
309
Sizes Tab
The bars, rungs, hoops, and cage bars rows allows the selection of different components to be
used with the ladder.
Type - Select the member type.
Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 43) variable in the configuration settings.
Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected.
Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog
box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section.
Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation
is used in bill of material reports.
Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is
used in bill of material reports.
X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis.
Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member.
Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis.
Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member.
Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.
310
311
Handrail
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Hand Rail
Steel toolbar: Hand Rail
Plant menu: Steel > Hand Rail
Command line: SHRAIL
Creates handrails in the drawing using specified corner points of the handrail or a polyline or 3D
polyline that defines the path of the handrail. You are prompted to specify the offset direction
after the points have been picked, or the polyline has been selected.
Dimensions Tab
Post below platform (+/-) - Enter the distance to place the hand rail above or below the
platform to which it is attached to.
Platform offset dist (+/-) - Enter the distance to offset the hand rail. The hand rail can be offset
away from or over the platform.
Start/end offset - Enter the distance from the end of the hand rail to place the post or
stanchion. This distance applies to both ends of the hand rail.
Max post spacing - Enter the maximum distance between the post or stanchions.
Spacing distance - Enter the vertical spacing between the rails. Use Add and Remove to
change the number of rails.
Sizes Tab
The top rail, intermediate rail, bottom rail, and post can have different components for the hand
rail.
Type - Select the member type.
Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 43) variable in the configuration file.
Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected.
Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog
box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section.
Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation
is used in bill of material reports.
Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is
used in bill of material reports.
X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis.
Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member.
Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis.
Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member.
Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.
312
Stair
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Draw > Stair
Steel toolbar: Stair
Plant menu: Steel > Stair
Command line: SSTAIR
Creates stairs in the drawing by specifying the top point of the stair and then a base elevation.
313
Dimension Tab
Tread
Boxes are disabled until the top point and bottom elevation are entered in the Position Tab. The
software then calculates initial values based on the top point and bottom elevation.
Changes made to
Recalculates
(C) Rise
(C) Rise
(C) Rise
(E) Run
(E) Run
(A) Total rise - Enter the distance between the bottom elevation and the top point.
(B) Riser count - Enter the number of risers (steps or treads) in the stair.
(C) Rise - Enter the distance between from the top of one riser to the top of the next riser.
(D) First rise - Enter the distance from the bottom elevation to the top of the first riser.
(E) Run - Enter the depth of the riser (if you were standing in front of the stair).
(F) Total Run - Enter the total length (measured horizontally) of the stair.
Stringer
Width - Enter the inside distance between the two stringers.
(H) Top extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the riser.
(J) Top clear - Enter the distance between the top of the stringer and the top point defined for
stair.
(K) Base extend - Enter the distance between the stringer end and the edge of the first riser.
(M) Base clear - Enter the distance between the bottom of the stringer and the bottom elevation
point.
314
Sizes Tab
You can define different components to use for the riser and the stringer.
Type - Select the member type.
Data file - Select the data file to use. The data files that display are controlled by the
SteelLibraryDirectory (on page 43) variable in the configuration file.
Size - Select the member section size from the data file selected.
Details - Click the three-dots button to activate the Details dialog box. Using the Details dialog
box, you can define annotations, offsets, rotations, and mirror the section.
Short annotation - Enter a description for the short annotation of the member. This annotation
is used in bill of material reports.
Long annotation - Enter a description for the long annotation of the member. This annotation is
used in bill of material reports.
X offset - Specify the member offset along the X-axis.
Remember that the base point is not always located at the centroid of the member.
Y offset - Specify the member offset along the Y-axis.
Rotation angle - Enter a rotation value in degrees for the member.
Mirror - Select to mirror the member about its base point.
1. On the Steel Draw panel, click Stair
315
316
SECTION 19
Command line
SCOPE
Miter - Cuts two coplanar members back to one another. For more
information, see Miter (on page 318).
SMITER
SCUT
Union - Joins two members. For more information, see Union (on
page 320).
SUNION
SCEDIT
SGCEDIT
SGCEDITALL
SCOMPANOT
SCONVERTSOLID
Layer Change - Moves steel solid or center lines to a new layer. For SLAYERCHANGE /
more information, see Layer Change (on page 328).
SSETEXIST /
SREMOVEEXIST
Selection Control - Toggles the display of grips on and off. For
more information, see Select Control (on page 329).
SELECTCONTROL
SAUTOCOPE
317
Steel - Cope
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cope
Steel toolbar: Cope
Plant menu: Steel > Cope
Command line: SCOPE
Copes steel members to other steel members. You can place bolted coping or welded coping.
Bolted coping is controlled by SteelCopeBoltDistance (on page 43) and provides a gap between
the coped member and the boundary member. Welded cope is controlled by
SteelCopeWeldDistance (on page 43) and provides a gap between the coped member and the
boundary member. You can:
Cope a single member to another single member that provides the cope boundary.
A member that crosses another member is cut into two separate members.
Miter
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Miter
Steel toolbar: Miter
Plant menu: Steel > Miter
Command line: SMITER
Miters two structural pieces to fit each other. The two structural pieces must be in the same
plane and have connected member ends. You miter multiple member pairs in each command
pass.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Miter
318
Cut
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Cut
Steel toolbar: Cut
Plant menu: Steel > Cut
Command line: SCUT
Cuts steel members along a plane that you define by an existing line or by points placed in the
drawing. The software updates the lengths, weight, and other affected properties of the cut
members. You cannot cut plate members with this command.
Line - Defines the plane using the two end points of the line and its extrusion direction (the Zaxis of the plane the line was drawn in).
Points - Defines the plane using three points you pick in the drawing.
319
Union
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Union
Steel toolbar: Union
Plant menu: Steel > Union
Command line: SUNION
Joins two or more steel members into one member. The members must have the same
properties for:
Insertion location
Centerline location
Rotation angle
Data file
Short annotation
Long annotation
Description
Material
Part number
In addition, the two center lines must meet each other but not intersect or overlap.
Curved members cannot be joined with straight members.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Union
Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Edit
Steel toolbar: Edit
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Local Edit
Command line: SCEDIT
Edits the properties of steel shapes and plates in the drawing. You can start this command from
the command line, the command icon, or by double-clicking the object you want to edit.
320
321
322
Details
Existing - Edits the existing status of the plate.
Short annotation - Defines the short annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file up to the first "X" character.
Long annotation - Defines the long annotation name for the plate. The default value is the text
in the MEMBER column of the data file.
Description - Defines the plate description. The default value is the "DESCRIPTION=" value in
the data file header.
Part number - Specifies the part number for the plate. You can enter the part number yourself
or use the part number automatically assigned by the SteelPartNumberFile (on page 44) startup
variable.
Material - Specifies the material for the plate. The default value is the "MATERIAL=" value in the
data file header.
323
Plate Dimensions
Length - Displays the length of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the
long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.
Width - Displays the width of the plate computed by finding a bounding box around the plate
aligned along an alignment axis. The alignment axis through the plate is the axis formed by the
long segment of the polyline used to create the plate.
Rotation - Specifies the rotation angle for the plate placement.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset from the plate centroid.
Hole Dimensions
On/Off - Select this option to place holes in the base plate. Clear this option to place a plate
without holes.
Row count - Enter the number of hole rows.
Row spacing - Enter the distance between the hole rows measured from the center of the
holes.
Column count - Enter the number of hole columns.
Column spacing - Enter the distance between the hole columns measured from the center of
the holes.
Diameter - Enter the diameter of the hole.
Rotation - Enter the angle at which to rotate the hole rows and columns within the base plate.
Slotted length - Enter a distance to create an elongated hole. This distance is measured from
the hole center.
X offset - Specifies the X-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Y offset - Specifies the Y-axis offset for the holes. Holes places at zero offset are at the base
plate center.
Pick Point - Click to place the base plate.
324
Global Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Global Edit
Plant menu: Steel > Component Edit > Global Edit
Command line: SGCEDIT
Edits short annotation, long annotation, description, part number, and material for multiple
components at one time. Changes to any or all of the edit boxes are made to each selected
component. Leave the edit boxes blank for those properties you do not want to edit.
325
326
3. Select the member shapes you want to edit. You can select more than one group to edit,
although you edit the groups one at a time.
4. Click OK.
The Component Edit dialog box displays.
5. Edit the member properties as needed. See Draw Steel Dialog Box for more information
about this dialog.
6. Click OK.
The software displays the number of components that were updated.
7. If you selected more than one group, the Component Edit dialog box displays the next
group.
8. Edit the member properties as needed.
9. Click OK.
327
Annotate Component
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Annotate Component
Command line: SCOMPANOT
Places the short or long annotations of selected steel members in the drawing.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Annotate Component
Convert Solid
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Convert Solid
Command line: SCONVERTSOLID
Creates the solid representation of component. When you have deleted the solid representation
and have been modeling using only centerlines, this command is used to re-create the solid
cross-section representation of the component.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Convert Solid
Layer Change
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Layer Change
Command line: SLAYERCHANGE / SSETEXIST / SREMOVEEXIST
Edits the existing flag for steel members and changes layers for steel solid and centerline
graphics.
The software automatically moves steel plates and base plates centerlines to whichever
layer is chosen for the corresponding solid.
1. On the Steel Edit panel, click Layer Change
328
Select Control
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Select Control
Command line: SELECTCONTROL
Toggles whether grip points are displayed on solids. To change the length of pipe or steel, you
can grip stretch the pipe or steel centerline. However, it may be difficult to select the center line
endpoint grip for steel shapes when solid grip points are on. Turning off the solid grip points with
this toggle makes it easier to grip stretch components.
Auto Cope
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel Edit > Auto Cope
Steel toolbar: Auto Cope
Plant menu: Steel > Auto Cope
Command line: SAUTOCOPE
Toggles the automatic coping of members on or off. When two members are coped and this
feature is on, the software automatically reapplies the cope when one of the members changes.
Select this command again to turn off the automatic coping feature.
329
330
SECTION 20
Command line
SBOMSETUP
Cut Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule listing each SBOMCUT
piece of steel with a length and a tag. For more information, see
Cut Steel Bill of Material (on page 334).
Total Steel BOM - Generates a Bill of Material schedule with one
tag for a total length of steel in each size. For more information,
see Total Steel Bill of Material (on page 336).
SBOMTOTAL
SBOMSINGLE
SBOMEXPORT
SDBFIN
Audit Steel Database - Compares the database with the drawing SDBAUDIT
displaying any differences between the two. For more information,
see Audit Steel Database (on page 342).
Synchronize Steel Database - Checks all components in the
drawing and updates them according to the current value within
the database tables. For more information, see Synchronize Steel
Database (on page 343).
SSYNC
SEXPORT
Import Steel Model - Imports a CIS/2 file into the current drawing. SIMPORT
For more information, see Import Steel Model (on page 344).
331
332
333
QTY
LONG ANNOTATION
LENGTH
WEIGHT
W14X74
120.00
1480.00
334
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
335
QTY
LONG ANNOTATION
LENGTH
WEIGHT
W14X74
240.00
1480.00
336
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
337
QTY
LONG ANNOTATION
LENGTH
WEIGHT
W14X74
120.00
740.00
W14X74
120.00
740.00
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
338
When exporting data to Microsoft Excel, numeric data is exported as text and is preceded by a
single quote. This single quote prevents you from totaling the column in Excel. To correct this in
Excel, select the column and then select Data > Text To Columns. Step through the wizard
selecting the Delimited option and Tab as the Delimiter check box. This changes the data from
text to numbers. In Imperial/Inch settings, length is exported in feet and inches, which cannot be
totaled in Excel. To export length in decimal format, change the current AutoCAD Dimension
Style settings Primary Units format to decimal.
339
When a component is deleted from the drawing and there is a live database active, that
component is marked for deletion in the database. When the drawing is closed, if the
drawing is not saved the item is not deleted from the database. If the drawing is saved, then
the item is deleted from the database.
When a component or a group of components are copied from a drawing to a new drawing
that uses the same live database, the copied components are duplicated in the live database
with the new drawing name.
When a component or a group of components are cut from a drawing and placed in another
drawing that uses the same live database, the components duplicate in the live database
with the new drawing name. When the old drawing is saved and closed any duplicate items
from the first drawing are deleted from the live database because they are no longer on the
first drawing.
All changes to live database settings take effect in the next drawing session.
On/Off - Turns the live database system on and off. When on, all components drawn are
updated instantaneously to the database. Changes can be made in the drawing or in the
database. When off, all CADWorx component information is stored only within the drawing.
Database Type - Select the type of database to use as the live database. Depending on the
type chosen, the path to the database or schema is displayed.
Access Path - Defines the Microsoft Access database information. Click Create Table to create
the PIPE table in the database when creating a new database. Click Select File to specify an
existing database.
340
Export Steel
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Export
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Export
Command line: SDBFGEN
Exports CADWorx steel information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
Database Type - Select Access to write to a Microsoft Access file, or select Excel to write to a
Microsoft Excel file.
Browse - Click to define the file name and folder location. The disabled boxes at the bottom of
the dialog display the file name and folder in use.
Append/Sync - Synchronizes the drawing and the database file by removing entries from the
database that no longer exist in the drawing and updating components in the database
according to the drawing. You can use this command once a day or five times an hour to
maintain the database according to the drawing. Many users can append to the same database
file at the same time.
New - Creates a new database file based on the chosen folder and database type.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Export
.
You can also type SDBFGEN in the command line.
2. Select the steel components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when
you are finished.
The Select Database Type dialog box displays.
3. Select Access or Excel to define the file type.
4. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name.
5. Select New if you are creating a new file.
or
Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file.
6. Click OK.
341
Import Steel
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: Steel BOM / DB > Import
Plant menu: Steel > Database > Import
Command line: SDBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx steel components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
This command is not available when you are using a live database.
Use the Export Steel (on page 341) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file to import.
1. On the Steel BOM / DB panel, click Import
342
343
344
SECTION 21
Command line
HVAC
HUSER
HGENERIC
Edit - Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. For more information, see HCEDIT
Edit (on page 356).
GC Edit - Edits global HVAC component data. For more
information, see GC Edit (on page 356).
HGCEDIT
HBOMSINGLE
HDATAREMOVE
345
HLAYERCHANGE
HDBAUDIT
HSYNC
Synchronize HVAC Database - Checks all components in the
drawing and updates them according to the current value in the
database. For more information, see Synchronize HVAC Database
(on page 367).
HVAC
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > HVAC Shapes
Plant menu: HVAC > Shapes
Command line: HVAC
Places HVAC and cable tray shapes in the drawing. Double-click an existing HVAC shape to
modify the parameters.
346
347
348
349
350
User Shape
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > User Shape
Command line: HUSER
Places a component using a custom user-defined shape. You select the component to draw
based on an existing user-shape DWG file. The extrusion direction and distance is based on
points picked or a line selected in the drawing. You can edit the roll angle along with the
standard annotations.
For user shapes to work, an ASCII file named Type.INI must be in the same folder as the user
shape drawing files. The Type.INI file must have TYPE=USER as the first line in the file. The
folder (...\CADWorx\Plant\\HVAC\) contains the user shape drawing files.
351
After you select the shape from the dialog box, you can pick points or select a line to determine
the extrusion length.
The default insert location for the user shape is 0,0,0. To specify a different insert location, add
an AutoCAD POINT entity to the profile .DWG to locate the insert point.
352
353
Generic Attach
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Generic Attach
Command line: HGENERIC
Attaches information to any generic AutoCAD object in the drawing. You can use the information
later in bill of material extraction, labeling, and so forth. After manually constructing a
component, use this routine to attach xdata information.
You cannot attach information to a CADWorx object or component.
To pinpoint the center of gravity locations use the Osnap commands. For example, to place
information on a beam and have it correctly reflect the center of gravity, draw a centerline and
pick MIDpoint, NEArest to the end of the centerline, or the exact location.
354
355
Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Edit
Command line: HCEDIT
Edits HVAC or cable tray shapes. This command displays the same dialog box that was used to
place the shape. You cannot change the object shape using this command. For more
information, see HVAC (on page 346).
GC Edit
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > GC Edit
Command line: HGCEDIT
Edits global HVAC component data.
356
357
358
359
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
360
361
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
362
A common mistake in AutoCAD is to apply a text height while setting up a text style. If the
height is specified in the text style dialog, then there is no other way of controlling the size. The
text size is set to the size in the dialog regardless of what the TEXTSIZE variable is set to.
CADWorx performs special optimization for automatic tag placement while in paper space only.
This optimization places tags in non-overlapping positions and is controlled by the
BomTagOptimize variable in the current configuration settings. For more information regarding
this functionality and its controls, see BomTagOptimize (on page 35).
363
Data Remove
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Data Remove
Command line: HCDATAREMOVE
Removes CADWorx data from components.
. Alternatively, type
2. Select the objects from which to remove the CADWorx data, and press ENTER.
A dialog box displays asking if you are sure that you want to remove the data.
3. Click Yes.
The software removes the CADWorx data from the selected components.
Layer Change
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > Layer Change
Command line: HLAYERCHANGE
Changes the solid and centerline layers associated with components.
364
. Alternatively, type
DB Generate
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > DB Generate
Command line: HDBFGEN
Exports CADWorx HVAC information to a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel file.
365
. Alternatively, type
2. Select the HVAC components to write to the database file. Right-click or press ENTER when
you are finished.
The Select Database Type dialog box displays.
3. Select Access or Excel to define the file type.
4. Click Browse, and define the folder and file name.
5. Select New if you are creating a new file.
or
Select Append/Sync if you want to synchronize an existing file.
6. Click OK.
DB In
CADWorx Steel / HVAC tab: HVAC Draw / BOM / DB > DB In
Command line: HDBFIN
Imports and draws CADWorx HVAC components from a Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file. This command is not available when you are using a live database.
Use the DB Generate (on page 365) command to create the Microsoft Access or Microsoft Excel
file to import.
366
2. Click Yes to confirm that you want to synchronize the drawing with the database.
367
368
SECTION 22
Toolbars
In This Section
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars ............................................ 369
Aliases and Command Names ...................................................... 370
Connecting to components ............................................................ 370
Compass ........................................................................................ 370
Plane versus Isometrics view modes ............................................ 370
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling .................................................. 370
Buttweld ......................................................................................... 371
Flanges .......................................................................................... 402
Flgd/BW Valves ............................................................................. 415
Lined .............................................................................................. 428
Fiberglass ...................................................................................... 434
Sanitary .......................................................................................... 452
Victaulic ......................................................................................... 486
Threaded/Socket ........................................................................... 491
Thrd/SW Valves ............................................................................. 524
Gaskets, Etc. ................................................................................. 538
Pipe Ends ...................................................................................... 540
Restraints ....................................................................................... 540
Misc................................................................................................ 541
Operators ....................................................................................... 548
Line Numbers ................................................................................ 548
UCS ............................................................................................... 549
Steel ............................................................................................... 549
Settings .......................................................................................... 551
Palettes .......................................................................................... 553
369
Toolbars
Connecting to components
In connecting to components, Piping Rules effect the behavior of prompts when set to No or
Show Options. If selecting a component from a palette or toolbar, the selected component
prompts you if unable to derive information from the surrounding components due to the piping
rules. When the rules are set to Automatic, the process is simplified for connecting components
to appropriate valued objects. For instance, when inserting a flange to a pipe, if both have the
same size and specification you are not prompted and the flange inserts automatically. For more
information, see Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 51) or all other Piping Rules (on page
49). Prompts depend on the settings you have chosen for the piping rules. Also, you may be
prompted in certain situations based on the components of the model. Most of the components
are built to work as smart objects. They connect using the previous information of the last point
of a component. If you change sizes while working with a component, you are prompted
accordingly. In addition, you may not receive prompts based on the actions of connection to
components. Prompts depend on the actions you take, and some prompts appear only when not
connecting to a previous component.
Compass
Enables 360 degree navigation for placement of components. You can turn the compass on and
off in Setup (on page 28). You are also provided with the option to change the color. When the
compass is turned on the screen displays a circle around the components when they are pulled
into the drawing space.
370
Toolbars
Buttweld
Plant menu: Toolbars > Buttweld
The commands on the Buttweld toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
Command Line
PIPW
90LR
90SR
45LR
TESW
Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the X-Y TERW
plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee (on page
378).
Plan 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 LR
Return (on page 379).
18LR
Plan 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return 18SR
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan 180 SR
Return (on page 379).
Conc Reducer - Places a concentric reducer component in
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Conc Reducer (on
page 380).
CONC
ECC
371
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
CAPW
CRSW
CRRW
Plan Lateral - Places a 45 degree lateral tee in the X-Y plane. LATW
For more information, see Plan Lateral (on page 382).
Miters - Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Miters (on page 383).
MPIP
SPIP
BENT
90 LR Ell - Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end R90LR
rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more
information, see 90 LR Ell (on page 386).
90 SR Ell - Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the
end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane. For more
information, see 90 SR Ell (on page 387).
R90SR
R45LR
RTESW
372
Plan 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Plan 22.5 Ell (on page 389).
22LR
YB
Toolbars
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Command Line
H90SR
H45LR
V45LR
H90RD
Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the HTESW
X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on page 393).
Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X- VTESW
Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page 393).
Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with the
branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Side Reducing Tee (on page 394).
HTERW
VTERW
Side 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return H18LR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Side 180 LR Return (on page 395).
Vert 180 LR Return - Places a 180 degree long radius return
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 LR Return
(on page 395).
V18LR
Side 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return H18SR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends on the X-Y plane.
For more information, see Side 180 SR Return (on page 396).
373
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Vert 180 SR Return - Places a 180 degree short radius return V18SR
normal to the X-Y plane with the return ends also normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert 180 SR Return
(on page 396).
Side Cross - Places a four-way straight cross with the branch HCRSW
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Cross
(on page 397).
Side Reducing Cross - Places a four-way reducing cross
with the reducing branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Side Reducing Cross (on page 397).
HCRRW
374
HLATW
VLATW
H11LR
V11LR
Side 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Side 22.5 Ell (on page 400).
H22LR
Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page 400).
V22LR
Side Wye - Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Wye
(on page 401).
HYB
Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the
branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Vert Wye (on page 401).
VYB
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Pipe
Buttweld toolbar: Pipe
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Tubing
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Pipe
Command line: PIPW
You can also now use PIPW1 for buttweld piping, PIPF1 for socket weld or threaded
piping, and PIPFL1 for flanged piping, to draw singular pipe. PIPW starts the pipe router.
Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis
Place a pipe
1. Click a pipe component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
The pipe component is drawn.
Plan 90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 LR Ell
Command line: 90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
375
Toolbars
Place a 90 degree plan elbow
1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the
selection.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.
The elbow component is drawn.
Plan 90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 90 SR Ell
Command line: 90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
376
Toolbars
Plan 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Plan 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Plan 45 Ell
Command line: 45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
377
Toolbars
Plan Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Tee
Command line: TESW
Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.
Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.
378
Toolbars
379
Toolbars
Conc Reducer
Buttweld toolbar: Conc Reducer
Victaulic toolbar: Conc Reducer
Command line: CONC
Places a concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point.
Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.
If you are connecting to another component where the large end is the same size as the
last component, press ENTER to attach to the last component drawn.
Ecc Reducer
Buttweld toolbar: Ecc Reducer
Victaulic toolbar: Ecc Reducer
Command line: ECC
Places an eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point.
Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.
Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.
380
Toolbars
Cap
Buttweld toolbar: Cap
Victaulic toolbar: Cap
Command line: CAPW
Places a pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.
Place a cap
1. Click a cap component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap.
The cap component is drawn.
Plan Cross
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Cross
Command line: CRSW
Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
Branch - Places the branch of the cross at the start point.
381
Toolbars
Plan Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Lateral
Command line: LATW
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main.
Branch - Places the branch of the lateral at the start point.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
382
Toolbars
Miters
Buttweld toolbar: Miters
Command line: MPIP
Places a mitered pipe component in the X-Y plane. The pipe is placed on a 2D polyline created
with Polyline
. A miter is placed on the pipe at each vertex of the polyline. For more
information, see PLINE in AutoCAD Help.
This command can also be used to create pipe with bends. For more information, see
CHAMFER in AutoCAD Help.
. For more
Rolled Pipe
Buttweld toolbar: Rolled Pipe
Command line: SPIP
Places a free-form pipe component, such as a hose or flexible connection. The pipe is placed on
a 2D polyline created with Polyline
and edited with the Fit or Spline options of Edit
Polyline
. For more information, see PLINE and PEDIT in AutoCAD Help.
383
Toolbars
Fit Example
Spline Example
. For more
Adjustable Bend
Buttweld toolbar: Adjustable Bend
Command line: BENT
Places a pipe bend based on the selected method: Enter radius, Trimmed elbow, or Select
arc.
384
Toolbars
Enter radius - Places a pipe bend by typing a radius, and then selecting the bend center, start,
and end points in a counterclockwise direction. This is the most common type of adjustable
bend.
Degree - Defines the total angle of the bend from the start point. For example, if the start
point is at 91, and the value for Degree is 180, the end point is at 271 and the total angle
of the bend is 180.
Angle - Defines the angle of the bend as the value minus the angle defined by the start point
from the positive X-axis. For example, if the start point is at 91, and the value for Angle is
180, the end point is at 180 and the angle of the bend is 79.
Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently
required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.
Trimmed elbow - Places an elbow by selecting the center of the bend arc, the start point, and
the end point.
Short radius - Defines a short radius elbow according to the current specification.
Long radius - Defines a long radius elbow according to the current specification.
Select arc - Places a pipe bend on an arc created with an arc command. For more information,
see Draw Arcs in AutoCAD Help.
Tangent length - Defines straight lengths of pipe at each end of the bend. This is frequently
required for machine bending. You can type a value of 0.
Select Arc
1. Draw an AutoCAD arc.
2. Click Adjustable Bend
on the Buttweld toolbar in the Miters drop-down. Alternatively,
type BENT on the command line, and then press ENTER.
3. Click Select Arc.
4. Select the arc in the drawing.
5. Type a Tangent length on the command line, and then press ENTER.
The adjustable bend displays in the drawing.
385
Toolbars
Trimmed Elbow
1. Click Adjustable Bend
on the Buttweld toolbar in the Miters drop-down. Alternatively,
type BENT on the command line, and then press ENTER.
2. Select Trimmed Elbow.
3. Select a corner point.
4. Select a first direction.
5. Select a second direction.
6. Select Long radius or Short radius.
The adjustable bend displays in the drawing.
90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 90 LR Ell
Command line: R90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y
plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
The elbow centerline is out-of-plane. You must use an AutoCAD UCS command to obtain
the proper plane before modifying the elbow. For more information, see UCS in AutoCAD
Help.
386
Toolbars
90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 90 SR Ell
Command line: R90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y
plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
The elbow centerline is out-of-plane. You must use an AutoCAD UCS command to obtain
the proper plane before modifying the elbow. For more information, see UCS in AutoCAD
Help.
45 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: 45 LR Ell
Command line: R45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow with the end rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.
This command is only available for welded fittings.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Start - Places the component anywhere in the drawing at any chosen start point.
Corner - Places the component at the corner of two pipes.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
Up - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the end of the elbow 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
The elbow centerline is out-of-plane. You must use an AutoCAD UCS command to obtain
the proper plane before modifying the elbow. For more information, see UCS in AutoCAD
Help.
387
Toolbars
Place a 45 degree rolled elbow
1. Click 45 LR Ell
Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Tee
Command line: RTESW
Places a tee with the branch rolled at a 45 degree angle from the X-Y plane.
Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.
Up - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the positive Z direction.
Down - Rotates the branch of the tee 45 degrees in the negative Z direction.
This command is only available for welded fittings.
388
Toolbars
Place a plan elbow
1. Click a plan elbow command.
2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.
The elbow component is drawn.
Plan Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Plan Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Plan Wye
Command line: YB
Places a wye in the X-Y plane.
389
Toolbars
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and the branches of the wye.
Branch - Places the branch of the component at the start point.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
Side 90 LR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 LR Ell
Command line: H90LR
Places a 90 degree long radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.
390
Toolbars
Side 90 SR Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 90 SR Ell
Command line: H90SR
Places a 90 degree short radius elbow normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.
Side 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Side 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Side 45 Ell
Command line: H45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or
next run is horizontal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.
391
Toolbars
Vert 45 Ell
Buttweld toolbar: Vert 45 Ell
Victaulic toolbar: Vert 45 Ell
Command line: V45LR
Places a 45 degree elbow normal to the X-Y plane. Use this command when the previous or
next run is vertical to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Up - Places the elbow bend in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the elbow bend in the negative Z direction.
392
Toolbars
Side Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Side Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Side Tee
Command line: HTESW
Places a straight tee with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the tee at the centerline intersection of the branch and main of the tee.
Up - Places the branch of the tee in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the tee in the negative Z direction.
Vert Tee
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Tee
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Tee
Command line: VTESW
Places a straight tee with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the tee is placed at
the start point by default.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Branch - Places the branch of the tee at the start point.
393
Toolbars
394
Toolbars
395
Toolbars
396
Toolbars
Side Cross
Buttweld toolbar: Side Cross
Victaulic toolbar: Side Cross
Command line: HCRSW
Places a four-way straight cross with the branch normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
397
Toolbars
Place a vertical reducing cross
1. Click a four-way vertical reducing cross command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the cross.
The cross component is drawn.
Side Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Side Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Side Lateral
Command line: HLATW
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main.
Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.
Vert Lateral
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Lateral
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Lateral
Command line: VLATW
Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is
placed at the start point by default.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.
398
Toolbars
399
Toolbars
400
Toolbars
Side Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Side Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Side Wye
Command line: HYB
Places a wye on the X-Y plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. This command is
typically used with pipe that is on the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.
Vert Wye
Buttweld toolbar: Vert Wye
Victaulic toolbar: Vert Wye
Command line: VYB
Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the branches also normal to the X-Y plane. This
command is typically used with pipe that is normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the wye at the centerline intersection of the main and branches of the wye.
401
Toolbars
Flanges
Plant menu: Toolbars > Flanges
Command Name
Command Line
Weld Neck - Places a weld neck flange in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Weld Neck Flange (on page 403).
FLGW
FLGO
FLGB
FLGT
FLGL
FLRO
FLRT
402
Toolbars
Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 404)
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 370).
403
Toolbars
Slip-on Flange
Flanges toolbar: Slip On
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Flange
Command line: FLGO
Places a slip-on flange in the X-Y plane. If Auto Gasket is turned on, then a gasket is also
placed on the flange. For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215).
last point - Starts the plain end of the flange at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Slip on end - Starts the flange at the slip-on end. This option appears when the previously
placed component (such as another flange) would logically take the face end as the start point
for the flange. Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite
direction.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end. This option appears when the previously placed
component (such as a pipe) would logically take the slip-on end as the start point for the flange.
Use this option to place the flange in a different location or in the opposite direction.
404
Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 404)
Toolbars
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 370).
405
Toolbars
Blind Flange
Flanges toolbar: Blind
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Blind Flange
Lined toolbar: Lined Blind Flange
Command line: FLGB
Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Place a flange
1. Click a flange component command.
2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the
system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and
skip step 3.
If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define
the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.
3. Click to select the direction of the flange.
The flange component is drawn.
Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have
defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 51) and Default Flange
Insertion Type.
406
Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 404)
Toolbars
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 370).
407
Toolbars
Threaded Flange
Flanges toolbar: Threaded
Command line: FLGT
Places a threaded flange in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be added
to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion
Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Thread end - Starts the flange at the threaded end.
Face end - Starts the flange at the face end.
Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 404)
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 370).
408
Toolbars
3. Click to select a starting point at the end of the existing flange. Alternatively, press ENTER
to connect to the last point.
The flange component is drawn with the face mating to the face of the existing flange.
Flanges do not have a bolt or gasket automatically added unless the proper piping
rule is set. For more information, see Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 51), or Apply
Bolt Insertion Rule (on page 51).
Place a flange
1. Click a flange component command.
2. Click to select a starting point. This must be another flange component; otherwise, the
system prompts you to add another flange. If prompted, select a flange from the list, and
skip step 3.
If you selected a Stub End or a Long Weld Neck the system prompts you to define
the length. Type the length as needed, and skip step 3.
3. Click to select the direction of the flange.
The flange component is drawn.
Some of the system prompts you may receive are based on the settings you have
defined in the piping rules for Apply Flange Insertion Rule (on page 51) and Default Flange
Insertion Type.
Stub End
Flanges toolbar: Stub End
Command line: STB
Places a stub-end coupling component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also
be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
Length - Defines the length of the stub-end. If no length is defined, the default value from the
current specification is used.
Plan end - Starts the stub at the plain end.
Face end - Starts the stub at the face end.
409
Toolbars
410
Toolbars
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 370).
411
Toolbars
Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 404)
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 370).
412
Toolbars
Place a flange that mates with another flange (on page 404)
413
Toolbars
.
For more information, see Connecting to components (on page 370).
414
Toolbars
Flgd/BW Valves
Plant menu: Toolbars > Flgd/BW Valves
The commands on the Flgd/BW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling
versus 2D Modeling (on page 370).
It is possible to add multiple pressure and ratings to valves in the Specification Editor. For
more information, see New and Edit Component Pane in the CADWorx Spec Editor User's
Guide.
If you draw a valve with multiple ratings in CADWorx Plant and then attach a flange, the
software prompts you when the flange and the valve rating do not match. You can select
Yes to override and insert the flange. Optionally, select No, and then insert a flange with a
matching rating.
Command Name
Command Line
GATF
BALF
Globe - Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. For GLBF
more information, see Globe Valve (on page 418).
Plug - Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. For
more information, see Plug Valve (on page 419).
PLUF
CHKF
BFYF
DIAF
ROTF
DCHF
415
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
CNTF
3VF
4VF
RELF
Angle Top - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. ANGF
For more information, see Angle Top Valve (on page 425).
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Command Line
H3VF
V3VF
H4VF
HRELF
VRELF
Angle Side - Places a 90 degree angle valve in the X-Y plane. HANGF
For more information, see Angle Side Valve (on page 428).
416
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Gate Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Gate
Command line: GATF
Places a gate valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Ball Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Ball
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Ball Valve
Command line: BALF
Places a ball valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
417
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Globe Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Globe
Command line: GLBF
Places a globe valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
418
Toolbars
Plug Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Plug
Victaulic toolbar: Sanitary Plug Valve
Command line: PLUF
Places a plug valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Center - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Check Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Check
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Check Valve
Command line: CHKF
Places a check valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component on the other end.
419
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Butterfly Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Butterfly
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Butterfly Valve
Command line: BFYF
Places a butterfly valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also
be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
420
Toolbars
Diaphragm Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Diaphragm
Command line: DIAF
Places a diaphragm valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets
using Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also
be added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Rotary Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Rotary
Command line: ROTF
Places a rotary component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using Auto
Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be added
to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket Insertion
Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
421
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Control Valve
Flanged Valves toolbar: Control
Command line: CNTF
Places a control valve component in the X-Y plane. You can place gaskets on flange sets using
Auto Gasket . For more information, see Auto Gasket (on page 215). Gaskets can also be
added to flange sets or flanges connecting to other components by setting the Apply Gasket
Insertion Rule (on page 51).
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Length - Specifies the length of the valve.
Center - Places the valve at its center.
422
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
423
Toolbars
424
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
425
Toolbars
Place a 3-way side valve
1. Click a three-way side valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve.
4. Select Up or Down.
The valve component is drawn.
426
Toolbars
427
Toolbars
Lined
Plant menu: Toolbars > Lined
The commands on the Lined toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
428
Command Line
PIPFL
90FL
45FL
Lined Tee Plan - Places a flanged and lined tee in the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Flanged Tee Plan (on page
444).
TEFL
TERE
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
CNFL
ECFL
Lined Wye Plan - Places a flanged and lined wye in the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Lined Wye Plan (on page
432).
YFL
Lined Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross CRSE
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Cross Plan (on
page 462).
Lined Reducing Cross Plan - Places a four-way flanged and
lined reducing cross in the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Cross Reducing Plan (on page 462).
CRRE
LATE
BLD
FLRO
FLGB
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Command Line
H90FL
H45FL
V45FL
Lined Tee Side - Places a flanged and lined tee with the
branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Flanged Tee Side (on page 451).
HTEFL
429
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
Lined Tee Vert - Places a flanged and lined tee with the main
normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
Tee Vertical (on page 451).
VTEFL
HTERE
VTERE
Lined Wye Side - Places a flanged and lined wye on the X-Y
plane with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Lined Wye Side (on page 433).
HYFL
VYFL
Lined Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and lined cross HCRSE
with the branches normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Cross Side (on page 478).
Lined Reducing Cross Side - Places a four-way flanged and HCRRE
lined reducing cross with the reducing branch normal to the XY plane. For more information, see Cross Reducing Side (on
page 478).
430
VCRRE
HLATE
VLATE
The specification for lined pipe components is delivered in the <Units>_Lined_Specs.prj file
in the [Product Folder]\Plant\Spec folder.
The FLGS column in the flanged component data files controls placement of flanges. A
value of 1 places a flange on the first end of the component. 2 places a flange on the second
end. 3 places flanges on both ends. 4 places a flange on the branch end of a tee or wye.
Other combinations of flanges are based on adding these values. For example, if the flanges
are needed on all ends of a tee, use 1 + 2 + 4 = 7.
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Lined Pipe
Lined toolbar: Lined Pipe
Command line: PIPFL
Places a flanged and lined pipe component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
Flanged end - Places the flanged end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the
pipe has a flange on one end.
Plain end - Places the plain end of the pipe at the start point. This option is used when the pipe
has a flange on one end.
Length - Defines the length of the pipe. If no length is defined, the length is based on the start
and end points.
Place a pipe
1. Click a pipe component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
The pipe component is drawn.
431
Toolbars
Place an eccentric reducer
1. Click an eccentric reducer component command.
2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe.
or
Select Small end, and press ENTER.
3. Click in the direction of the other end of the reducer.
4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side.
or
To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down.
The reducer component is drawn.
432
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
433
Toolbars
Fiberglass
Plant menu: Toolbars > Fiberglass
The commands on the Fiberglass toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
Command Line
PIPF
TESS
SWGCS
SWGES
CRSS
LATS
CPS
434
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
BUSS
SOL
FRP Blind Flange - Places a blind flange in the X-Y plane. FLGB
For more information, see Blind Flange (on page 406).
FRP Flange - Places a socket type flange in the X-Y plane. FLGS
For more information, see Socket Type Flange (on page
406).
FRP Flanged 90 Ell Plan - Places a 90 degree flanged
elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Flanged
90 Degree Elbow Plan (on page 442).
90FL
45FL
TEFL
Command Line
HTESS
435
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
VTESS
HLATS
VLATS
VCPS
VSOL
H90FL
H45FL
V45FL
HTEFL
VTEFL
You must set the <Units>_FRP_Specs.prj default specification that is supplied with CADWorx
for the icons to work on the toolbar.
436
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Fiberglass Pipe
Fiberglass toolbar: Pipe
Command line: PIPF
Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane.
Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.
Threaded
Bevel
Plain
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
Center - Places the pipe along the center of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
437
Toolbars
Place a 90 degree plan elbow
1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the
selection.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.
The elbow component is drawn.
438
Toolbars
439
Toolbars
440
Toolbars
Coupling
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bell Full Clpg Plan
Victaulic toolbar: Victaulic Coupling
Command line: CPS
Places a coupling in the X-Y plane.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
Threaded/Socket Cap
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Cap
Command line: CAPS
Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.
441
Toolbars
Place a cap
1. Click a cap component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap.
The cap component is drawn.
Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing
Fiberglass toolbar: FRP Bush/Insert
Command line: BUSS
Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Large end - Places the large end at the start point of the component.
Small end - Places the small end at the start point of the component.
Place a bushing
1. Click a bushing component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.
The bushing component is drawn.
Sock-O-Let
Fiberglass toolbar: Sock-O-Let
Command line: SOL
Places a sock-o-let in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
442
Toolbars
Place a 90 degree plan elbow
1. Click a 90 degree plan elbow component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or select an option. The system prompts vary based on the
selection.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Click in the direction of the bend of the elbow.
The elbow component is drawn.
443
Toolbars
444
Toolbars
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
445
Toolbars
446
Toolbars
447
Toolbars
Place a side lateral
1. Click a side lateral component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the lateral.
4. Select Up or Down.
The lateral component is drawn.
448
Toolbars
Saddle in Vertical
Fiberglass toolbar: Saddle in Vertical
Command line: VSOL
Places a soc-o-let with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is placed at
the start point by default.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Up - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the top of the soc-o-let in the negative Z direction.
449
Toolbars
450
Toolbars
451
Toolbars
Sanitary
Plant menu: Toolbars > Sanitary
The commands on the Sanitary toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
Command Line
PIPW
45EN
TESE
452
CRRE
LATE
LARE
22EN
Toolbars
Command Name
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan - Places an 11.25 degree sanitary
elbow in the X-Y plane. For more information, see Sanitary
11.25 Ell Plan (on page 465).
Command Line
11EN
CONCE
ECCE
YE
CAPE
GATE
BALE
GLBE
PLUE
CHKE
BFYE
453
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
3VE
ANGE
AIR1
AIR2
AIR3
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Command Line
H45EN
V45EN
HTESE
VTESE
454
VTERE
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
HCRSE
HCRRE
HLATE
HLARE
VLARE
H22EN
V22EN
H11EN
V11EN
455
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
HUBEN
VUBEN
HYE
HANGE
Sanitary fitting components can have many end types, such as butt-welded, flanged, ferrule,
coupling, hub, square, bull, and a simple engagement used with threaded and socket-welded
piping. The end types can also vary for each end of a fitting, as shown in the examples below.
456
Toolbars
The available end types are defined by the selected specification, and the prompts for each
command reflect the end type used. Available end types are shown below.
End types are delivered in the files End1.dwg through End17.dwg in the [Product
Folder]\Plant\Support folder.
457
Toolbars
The multi-port valves have special port controls in the data files. Listed below are all the port
types available for these valves. When all three ports are specified in the data file, all three ports
are drawn on the drawing. When only one or two ports are required, place 0 in the last port
entries and this supplies either a one or two port valve.
CADWorx end types are exported to ISOGEN as shown in the following table.
458
PL (Plain)
BW (Butt weld)
FL (Flanged)
LN (Liner/Nut)
LN (Liner/Nut)
MP (Male Part)
MP (Male Part)
MP (Male Part)
MP (Male Part)
Toolbars
9
CL (Clamped)
10
CL (Clamped)
11
CL (Clamped)
12
CL (Clamped)
13
CL (Clamped)
14
SW (Socket Weld)
15
SC (Screwed)
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
459
Toolbars
460
Toolbars
461
Toolbars
Cross Plan
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Plan
Command line: CRSE
Places a four-way straight cross in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Center - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the cross at the start point.
Branch1 - Places the first branch of the cross at the start point.
Branch2 - Places the second branch of the cross at the start point.
The end type is defined by the current specification.
462
Toolbars
Place a sanitary plan reducing cross
1. Click Sanitary Cross Reducing Plan
Lateral Plan
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Plan
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Plan
Command line: LATE
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main.
otherEnd - Places the other end of the lateral at the start point.
Branch - Places the branch end of the lateral at the start point.
The end type is defined by the current specification.
463
Toolbars
Place a plan lateral
1. Click a plan lateral command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the lateral.
4. Click in the direction of the branch of the lateral.
The lateral component is drawn.
464
Toolbars
465
Toolbars
Place a sanitary u-bend
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Sanitary Concentric
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Concentric
Command line: CONCE
Places a sanitary concentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.
Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.
The end type is defined by the current specification.
Sanitary Eccentric
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Eccentric
Command line: ECCE
Places a sanitary eccentric reducer component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Large end - Places the large end of the reducer at the start point.
Small end- Places the small end of the reducer at the start point.
Up - Places the flat side of the reducer in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the flat side of the reducer in the negative Z direction.
The end type is defined by the current specification.
466
Toolbars
Place an eccentric reducer
1. Click an eccentric reducer component command.
2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe.
or
Select Small end, and press ENTER.
3. Click in the direction of the other end of the reducer.
4. To place the flat side in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the flat side.
or
To place the flat side in the Z direction, select Up or Down.
The reducer component is drawn.
Sanitary Stub
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Stub
Command line: STUE
Places a sanitary stub coupling component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Plan end - Places the plan end at the start point.
Face end - Places the face end at the start point.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling component command.
2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
467
Toolbars
Place a plan wye
1. Click a plan wye command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the wye.
The wye component is drawn.
Sanitary Cap
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cap
Command line: CAPE
Places a sanitary pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.
Place a cap
1. Click a cap component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap.
The cap component is drawn.
Sanitary Nut/Coupling
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Nut/Coupling
Command line: NUTE
Places a sanitary nut/coupling in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling component command.
2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
468
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
469
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
470
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
471
Toolbars
472
Toolbars
473
Toolbars
Place a multi-port valve
1. Click a multi-port valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. To place the valve actuator in the X-Y plane, click in the direction of the actuator.
or
To place the valve actuator normal to the X-Y plane, select Up.
4. Type a value to rotate the valve about the actuator body axis.
The valve component is drawn.
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
474
Toolbars
475
Toolbars
476
Toolbars
477
Toolbars
Cross Side
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Cross Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Cross Side
Command line: HCRSE
Places a four-way straight cross with the branches normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the cross at the centerline intersection of the cross.
Flanged - Places the flanged end of the cross at the start point.
478
Toolbars
Place a sanitary side reducing cross
1. Click Sanitary Reducing Cross Side
Lateral Side
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Side
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Side
Command line: HLATE
Places a 45 degree lateral in the X-Y plane with the branch in the X-Z or Y-Z plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the lateral at the centerline intersection of the branch and main.
coupLing End - Places the coupling end of the lateral at the start point.
Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.
479
Toolbars
Lateral Vertical
Sanitary toolbar: Sanitary Lateral Vertical
Lined toolbar: Lined Lateral Vert
Command line: VLATE
Places a 45 degree lateral with the main normal to the X-Y plane. The center of the lateral is
placed at the start point by default.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Up - Places the branch of the lateral in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch of the lateral in the negative Z direction.
480
Toolbars
481
Toolbars
482
Toolbars
483
Toolbars
484
Toolbars
485
Toolbars
Place a 3-way vertical valve
1. Click a three-way vertical valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
3. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve.
The valve component is drawn.
Victaulic
Plant menu: Toolbars > Victaulic
The commands on the Victaulic toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
486
Command Line
PIPW
90LR
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
90SR
45LR
11LR
22LR
Plan Tee - Places a straight tee in the X-Y plane. For more TESW
information, see Plan Tee (on page 378).
Plan Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee in the
X-Y plane. For more information, see Plan Reducing Tee
(on page 378).
TERW
CRSW
CCRW
YB
LATW
TEFL
487
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
ECC
CAPW
CPS
FLGO
BFYF
CHKF
PLUF
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Command Line
488
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
H22LR
Vert 22.5 Ell - Places a 22.5 degree elbow normal to the X- V22LR
Y plane. For more information, see Vert 22.5 Ell (on page
400).
Side Tee - Places a straight tee with the branch normal to
the X-Y plane. For more information, see Side Tee (on
page 393).
HTESW
Vert Tee - Places a straight tee with the main normal to the VTESW
X-Y plane. For more information, see Vert Tee (on page
393).
Side Reducing Tee - Places a straight reducing tee with
the branch normal to the X-Y plane. For more information,
see Side Reducing Tee (on page 394).
HTERW
VTERW
HCRSW
489
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
VCRRW
HYB
Vert Wye - Places a wye normal to the X-Y plane with the
branches also normal to the X-Y plane. For more
information, see Vert Wye (on page 401).
VYB
HLATW
VLATW
VTEFL
You must use one of the Victaulic default specifications that are supplied with CADWorx for the
icons to work on the toolbar.
This toolbar provides components manufactured by Victaulic Corporation. The Victaulic
specifications and data files have been provided by Victaulic and can be used to draw
components supplied by this company. The specifications supplied are for AWWA, IPS, 304,
316, and PFCS type components.
490
Toolbars
Threaded/Socket
Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Fittings
The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket
weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded
and Socket
Weld
commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 27) to switch between these two
modes.
The commands on the Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D
mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling
versus 2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
Command Line
NIP
TUBE
90S/90T
90SS/90ST
45S/45T
90RS/90RT
TESS/TEST
TERS/TERT
SWGC
491
Toolbars
Command Name
492
Command Line
SWGE
SWGCT
SWGET
CAPS/CAPT
CRSS/CRST
LATS/LATT
PLGT
BUSS/BUST
CPS/CPT
HCPS/HCPT
CPRS/CPRT
WOL
TOL
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
SOL
EOLW
EOLT
EOLS
LOLS
NOLP
NOLT
UNS/UNT
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side - Places a 90 degree threaded/socket
elbow normal to the X-Y plane. For more information, see
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side (on page 511).
Command Line
H90S/H90T
493
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
H90SS/H90ST
H45S/H45T
V45S/V45T
HTESS/HTEST
VTESS/VTEST
VTERS/VTERT
494
VLATS/VLATT
VCPS/VCPT
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
VHCPS/VHCPT
VCPRS/VCPRT
VWOL
VTOL
VSO:
HEOLW
HEOLT
HEOLS
VEOLS
HLOLW
495
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
HLOLT
VNOLP
VNOLP
The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with
additional commands available.
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Thrd/SW Pipe
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Pipe
Command line: PIPF
Places a pipe component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
If the drawing environment is set to threaded, the piping component has threaded ends.
If the drawing environment is set to a socket weld, the piping component has plain ends.
Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.
Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears
when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 27).
Bevel - Used when working with welded components.
Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when
the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel
(on page 27).
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
TOP - Places the pipe along the top of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
BOP - Places the pipe along the bottom of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Right - Places the pipe along the right side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
Left - Places the pipe along the left side of the pipe, as defined along the Z-axis.
496
Toolbars
Place a threaded/socket pipe
1. Click a pipe component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
3. Click to select an ending point, or type coordinates in the command line and press ENTER.
4. If you receive a prompt for end types, type the option on the command line and press
ENTER.
The pipe component is drawn.
Nipple
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Nipple
Command line: NIP
Places a pipe nipple in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the pipe at the last point of the previously-created component.
Length - Defines the length of the fitting component.
Close - Reads the close distance as specified in the data file.
Ends - Specifies the end options for the starting and ending of the pipe.
Threaded - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears
when the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 27).
Plain - Used when working with threaded pipe. The threaded default option appears when
the environment is set to threaded mode. For more information, see Setup Size/Spec Panel
(on page 27).
Place a nipple
1. Click Nipple
. Alternatively, type NIP on the command line and then press ENTER.
497
Toolbars
Tube
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Tube
Command line: TUBE
Attaches tubing to any 2D or 3D polyline. Different radii can be placed at each vertex of the
polyline, or you can define a common radius for all corners.
Use the Router
routing capabilities.
Tubing uses the pipe component entry within the CADWorx Plant specifications. Pipe and tubing
can be used concurrently. Tubing can occupy a range of 1/8 1/2, whereas regular pipe can
occupy 3/4 and above. Tubing can be set up as an optional component, or the specification can
be set up to only handle tubing.
After tubing is placed in the drawing, other components can be inserted into it. Like normal
piping, tubing also automatically breaks. Even after a component is inserted, the tubing remains
as one piece. When edited with CEDIT, the tubing attached to a single polyline also acts as one
piece.
Grouping is controlled by the PICKSTYLE environmental variable, which must be turned
on for the tubing to act as one piece. Alternatively, you can use the CADWorx GROUPTOG
command to turn the AutoCAD grouping control on or off. For more information, see Group
On/Off (on page 175).
Enter corner radius - Defines the radius to be used at each vertex.
Manual - Places individual radii at each corner of the selected polyline. The software pauses at
each vertex so that the radius can be defined. A rubber-banded line back to the actual vertex is
shown in the drawing.
Tubing is exported to a live database, and appears in the CADWorx Bill of Material as one
piece.
Tubing is exported to the CADWorx ISOGEN isometric generator and appears in the
ISOGEN material list.
Tubing can be stretched only at the end point of the tube run by using the square grip point.
You can also use the plus grip points
to route pipe from the tubing.
Place tubing
1. Click Tube
. Alternatively, type TUBE on the command line and then press ENTER.
498
Toolbars
499
Toolbars
Place a 90 degree street plan elbow
1. Click Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan
then press ENTER.
If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type 90ST on the command line.
2. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.
3. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
4. Click in the direction of the corner.
5. Click in the direction of the male end of the elbow.
If the male end is placed first, the system prompts you for placement of the female
end.
The elbow component is drawn.
500
Toolbars
501
Toolbars
2. Pick a starting point for the large end, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the small end of the reducer.
4. Specify the end type connection at the large end of the reducer.
Type the required alpha description.
5. Specify the end type connection at the small end of the reducer.
The reducer component is drawn.
502
Toolbars
503
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Cap
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Cap
Command line: CAPS/CAPT
Places a threaded/socket pipe cap in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Cap end - Places the top of the cap at the start point.
Place a cap
1. Click a cap component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the cap.
The cap component is drawn.
504
Toolbars
Place a plan cross
1. Click a four-way straight cross command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the cross.
The cross component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Plug
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug
Command line: PLGT
Places a plug in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Cap end - Places the cap end of the component at the start point.
505
Toolbars
Place a plug
1. Click a plug component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the end point.
The plug component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Bush/Insert
Command line: BUSS/BUST
Places a bushing in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Large end - Places the non-reducing end at the start point.
Small end - Places the reducing end at the start point.
Place a bushing
1. Click a bushing component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the bushing.
The bushing component is drawn.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
506
Toolbars
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
Place a coupling
1. Click a coupling component command.
2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the end of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
507
Toolbars
508
Toolbars
509
Toolbars
510
Toolbars
Thrd/SW Union
Thrd/SW Fittings toolbar: Thrd/SW Union
Command line: UNT
Places a threaded/socket union in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Middle - Places the component at the centerline intersection of the union.
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
511
Toolbars
Place a side or vertical elbow
1.
2.
3.
4.
If the drawing environment is set to threaded mode, type H90ST on the command line.
2. To optionally place the male end first, right-click and select Male.
3. Pick a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
4. Click in the direction of the corner.
5. Select Up or Down.
The elbow component is drawn.
512
Toolbars
Place a side or vertical elbow
1. Click a side or vertical elbow component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Select Up or Down.
The elbow component is drawn.
513
Toolbars
Place a side reducing elbow
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
514
Toolbars
Place a vertical tee
1. Click a vertical tee component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee.
The tee component is drawn.
515
Toolbars
Place a vertical tee
1. Click a vertical tee component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the branch of the tee.
The tee component is drawn.
516
Toolbars
517
Toolbars
Place a coupling end
1. Click a coupling end component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe.
3. Click to select the direction of the top of the coupling.
The coupling component is drawn.
518
Toolbars
519
Toolbars
Place a side elbowlet fitting
1. Click a side elbowlet component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the branch end of the fitting.
4. Select Up or Down.
The fitting component is drawn.
520
Toolbars
521
Toolbars
Place a vertical elbowlet fitting
1. Click a plan fitting component command.
2. Pick a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the buttweld end of the fitting.
The fitting component is drawn.
522
Toolbars
523
Toolbars
Place a vertical fitting
1. Click a vertical fitting component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Select Up or Down.
The fitting component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Valves
Plant menu: Toolbars > Thrd/SW Valves
The Command Line column in the table below shows the command for the socket
weld component and the equivalent threaded component. Use the Threaded
and Socket
Weld
commands on the Setup Size/Spec Panel (on page 27) to switch between the two
modes.
The commands on the Thrd/SW Valves toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D
mode depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling
versus 2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
Command Line
BALS/BALT
524
CHKS/CHKT
NEDS/NEDT
DIAS/DIAT
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
ROTS/ROTT
DCHS/DCHT
CNTS/CNTT
GAGS/GAGT
EGAB
X-Body Gate Thrd - Places a threaded X-body style gate valve EGAT
in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate Thrd
(on page 534).
X-Body Gate SW - Places a socket weld X-body style gate
valve in the X-Y plane. For more information, see X-Body Gate
SW (on page 535).
EGAS
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
525
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
V3VS/V3VT
HRELS/HRELT
VRELS/VRELT
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Thrd/SW Gate
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gate
Command line: GATS/GATT
Places a threaded or socket weld gate valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
526
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Ball
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Ball
Command line: BALS/BALT
Places a threaded or socket weld ball valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Globe
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Globe
Command line: GLBS/GLBT
Places a threaded or socket weld globe valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
527
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Plug
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Plug
Command line: PLUS/PLUT
Places a threaded or socket weld plug valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Check
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Check
Command line: CHKS/CHKT
Places a threaded or socket weld check valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Start - Places the start point of the component at the default start point.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.
528
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Needle
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Needle
Command line: NEDS/NEDT
Places a threaded or socket weld needle valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Diaphragm
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Diaphragm
Command line: DIAS/DIAT
Places a threaded or socket weld diaphragm valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
529
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Rotary
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Rotary
Command line: ROTS/ROTT
Places a threaded or socket weld rotary valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
530
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Control
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Control
Command line: CNTS/CNTT
Places a threaded or socket weld control valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Length - Specifies the length of the component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
531
Toolbars
Place a 3-way plan valve
1. Click a three-way valve command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange. Alternatively, press
ENTER to connect to the last point and skip the next step.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve. This prompt only appears when you are not
connecting to a component in the model.
4. Click in the direction of the branch of the valve.
The valve component is drawn.
532
Toolbars
Place a relief side valve
1. Click a relief valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe.
3. Click in the direction of the corner.
4. Click in the direction of the relief end of the valve.
The valve component is drawn.
Thrd/SW Gage
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW Gage
Command line: GAGS/GAGT
Places a threaded or socket weld gage valve in the X-Y plane
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Middle - Places the valve at its center.
To pick the outlet locations of the gage valve, use the MIDpoint of OSnap command and
then pick the sides on the outlet end.
Because there is no way to accurately locate the outlets in 3D, first draw the component in
2D and then use the CONVERTSOLID command to convert the valve component to 3D
solids.
533
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
X-Body Gate BW
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate BW
Command line: EGAB
Places a butt weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
534
Toolbars
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
X-Body Gate SW
Thrd/SW Valves toolbar: Thrd/SW X-Body Gate SW
Command line: EGAS
Places a socket weld X-body style gate valve in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the plain end of the valve at the last point of the previously-created
component.
Place a valve
1. Click a valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
Alternatively, press ENTER to connect to the last point. This works only when
connecting to a flange, otherwise follow the prompts provided by the software.
The valve component is drawn.
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
535
Toolbars
Place a 3-way side valve
1. Click a three-way side valve component command.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as at the end of a pipe or a flange.
3. Click in the direction of the main of the valve.
4. Select Up or Down.
The valve component is drawn.
536
Toolbars
537
Toolbars
Gaskets, Etc.
Plant menu: Toolbars > Gaskets, Etc.
Command Name
Command Line
TICK
STDBOLT
GAS
WELD
The arrow in the lower right corner of a command button indicates a fly-out menu with
additional commands available.
Gasket
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Gasket
Command line: GAS
Places a gasket. The gasket is composed of two different entities. First is an inserted block that
is located at the insert point. Another inserted block is placed on the other side of the gasket.
The GASR contains Xdata information for Bill of Materials extraction. GASL is a plain insert
without information. When you use mode conversion to convert components to another mode in
a Z-plane position, the GASL insert is destroyed. When you convert the single GASR insert in
the proper X and Y planes, both sides of the gasket are created again.
The shape of the gasket allows for other uses, as explained below.
The half circle on the outer portion of both inserts allow for easy picking for dimensioning. For
example, when dimensioning, select Osnap, CENter of, and pick the center of circle which is the
exact corner of the face of flange). You should find that it is relatively easy to select the center of
the circle from a zoomed out view.
For placing a flange face against the gasket, you can select Osnap, ENDpoint of, and select the
side of the gasket to place the flange perfectly in position. This provides a method of placing the
flange when the last point option is no longer available.
This routine is also used for ring type joints. The data files for rings have an extra column
indicating the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional column and adds this ring
number to the bill of materials description. The distance between the faces of adjoining flanges
(under compression) are used in this file instead of the actual depth of the ring.
538
Toolbars
Insert a gasket
1. Click Gasket
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to
select the last point of the previously-placed component.
3. Click in the required direction.
The software inserts a gasket at the selected location.
The same procedure can be used to place ring type joints. The data files for rings have
an extra column, which indicates the ring number. The gasket routine senses this additional
column, and adds this ring number to the Bill of Materials description. The distance between the
faces of adjoining flanges (under compression) is used in this file instead of the actual depth of
the ring.
You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the
Apply Gasket Insertion Rule (on page 51) in Piping Rules under Setup
.
Weld Gap
Gaskets, Etc. toolbar: Weld Gap
Command line: WELD
Creates weld gaps for detailed pipe fabrication. Weld gaps are controlled by the currently
defined specification and are placed according to size and/or schedule.
last point - Places the weld gap at the last point of the previously-created component.
Each specification has data files that provide different thicknesses.
2. Click to select a starting point, such as the end of a pipe. Alternatively, press ENTER to
select the last point of the previously-placed component.
3. Click in the required direction.
The software creates a weld gap.
Use Osnap > Insert and select any portion of the weld gap symbol to start a new pipe or
component from the weld gap
You can set the software to automatically add Gaskets when needed by changing the
Apply Weld Insertion Rule (on page 50) in Piping Rules under Setup
.
539
Toolbars
Pipe Ends
Plant menu: Toolbars > Pipe Ends
Command Name
Command Line
ENDFLG
ENDPIPE
Restraints
Plant menu: > Toolbars > Restraints
The types of restraints used with CADWorx Plant are listed in the table below.
Command Name
Command Line
TRANSLATIONAL
ANCHOR
SPRING
ROTATIONAL
SNUBBER
540
Toolbars
Restraints appear on the drawing in a symbolic format. You can modify the symbol shape that
appears on the output drawing by editing the restraint drawing file. These drawing files are
delivered to the [Product Folder]\Support folder. If necessary, a restraint symbol can be redrawn as a three-dimensional shape. In these instances, you must maintain the base of the
restraint at 0,0,0 and the direction of the restraint at 0 degrees.
The CAESARIITolerance (on page 36) variable is useful when the bi-directional process
encounters a problem locating a restraint along a pipe line, especially if the pipe line is
sloped.
All supports drawn using the Restraint commands in CADWorx Plant are exported as guides
to ISOGEN. To export a different symbol to ISOGEN, use the ISOGEN Data dialog box (on
page 73) to change the SKEY. Acceptable SKEY values are ANCH, DUCK, GUID, SKID,
SPRG, and HANG. For information about the sample ISOGEN shapes used with these
SKEYS, see the ISOGEN Symbol Keys Reference Guide, which is delivered as a PDF file to
the [Product Folder]\ISOGEN\Isogen_Utils folder.
You can also use the ISOGEN Data dialog box to change the support direction.
Misc
Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc
Use the Threaded
and Socket Weld
commands on the Setup Size/Spec
Panel (on page 27) to switch between these two modes for SW/Thrd Plan and SW/Thrd Side.
The commands on the Misc toolbar can be used for modeling in 3D or 2D mode
depending on how you define the drawing mode. For more information, see 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 370).
Command Name
Command Line
STRT
USERCREATE
User Shape 1 - Places user created shape 1 in the X-Y plane. USE1
For more information, see User Shapes (on page 176).
User Shape 2 - Places user created shape 2 in the X-Y plane. USE2
For more information, see User Shapes (on page 176).
User Shape 3 - Places user created shape 3 in the X-Y plane. USE3
For more information, see User Shapes (on page 176).
User Shape 4 - Places user created shape 4 in the X-Y plane. USE4
For more information, see User Shapes (on page 176).
541
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
User Shape 5 - Places user created shape 5 in the X-Y plane. USE5
For more information, see User Shapes (on page 176).
Bleed Ring - Places a bleed ring in the drawing in the X-Y
plane. For more information, see Bleed Ring or Spacer (on
page 544).
BLD
SPCT
REINFSAD
ELEMENT
GENERIC
STOPSIGN
The commands in the table below are designed for modeling in 2D.
Command Name
Command Line
HSTRF
HSTRT
Spec Bld Vert - Places a blind spectacle with the main normal VSPCT
to the X-Y plane. For more information, see Spectacle Blind
Vertical (on page 547).
The arrow in the lower right corner of the button indicates a flyout for more options.
542
Toolbars
Modeling in 3D
These commands are useful for 3D modeling. All of the following commands are available in 3D
and 2D modeling.
Flanged Plan
Misc toolbar: Flanged Plan
Command line: STRF
Places a flanged pipe component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Length - Specifies the length of the component.
Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.
Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.
Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.
2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a main end direction.
4. Select branch direction.
The flanged plan pipe is placed.
543
Toolbars
SW/Thrd Plan
Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Plan
Command line: STRT
Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Length - Specifies the length of the component.
Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component.
otherEnd - Place the start point of the component at the other end.
Main end - Specifies the direction of the second point.
Branch end - Specifies the direction of the branch end of the pipe.
2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a main end direction.
4. Select branch direction.
The plan socket weld/threaded pipe is placed.
2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a direction in the drawing.
The bleed ring is placed.
544
Toolbars
2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a direction in the drawing.
4. Select a direction in the drawing.
The side blind spectacle is placed.
Reinforcing Saddle
Miscellaneous toolbar: Reinforcing Saddle
Command line: REINFSAD
Attaches a reinforcement saddle to a branch connection. On the drawing, the reinforcement
saddle is represented by the alpha-identifier S. This symbolic letter has Xdata attached to it that
is used in Bill of Material generation and with the CAESAR II bi-directional link.
For more information, see Insert a reinforcement saddle (on page 261).
Expansion Joint
Misc toolbar: Expansion Joint
Command line: EXPF
Places an expansion joint in the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Length - Specifies the length of the expansion joint.
545
Toolbars
Rigid Element
Misc toolbar: Rigid Element
Command line: ELEMENT
Places a CAESAR II element in the drawing.
Used with CAESAR II (pipe stress analysis software) when a rigid component is required. This is
convenient when using a rigid from the base of a pump to the pump discharge piping, or placing
a rigid as a structural member that might be supporting the pipe.
When using the CAESAR II bi-directional link or importing a stress input file, rigids can be
automatically placed. These rigids are used by the bi-directional link and should not be modified
in any manner. They can be moved with a piping system, but they need to remain in their
relative location. They are often used when the length of a CAESAR II component does not
match the components contained within CADWorx.
These elements are represented with a polyline that has pointed ends. Specify where rigid
elements display from the LayerByLineNumber (on page 39) configuration setting.
Modeling in 2D
Commands are designed for plotting in 2D. The views in these commands appear this way only
in a 2D drawing.
Flanged Side
Misc toolbar: Flanged Side
Command line: HSTRF
Places a pipe component normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Length - Specifies the length of the component.
Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.
Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch direction in the negative the Z direction.
2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a direction in the drawing.
4. Select Up or Down.
The side flanged pipe is placed.
546
Toolbars
SW/Thrd Side
Misc toolbar: SW/Thrd Side
Command line: HSTRT
Places a socket weld/threaded strainer component normal to the X-Y plane.
last point - Starts the component at the last point of the previously-created component.
Length - Specifies the length of the component.
Length of basket side - Specifies the length of the basket side of the component.
otherEnd - Places the start point of the component at the other end.
Up - Places the branch in the positive Z direction.
Down - Places the branch in the negative Z direction.
2. Type L for length, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
length, follow the prompts back to this step for the last point.
3. Select a direction in the drawing.
4. Select Up or Down.
The socket weld threaded pipe is placed.
2. Type T for thickness, or press ENTER to connect to the last point. If you are entering the
thickness, follow the prompts back to this step for the start point.
3. Select a point in the drawing.
4. Select Up or Down.
The blind spectacle is drawn.
547
Toolbars
Operators
Plant menu: Toolbars > Operators
Command Name
Command Line
TOPWORKSADD
TOPWORKSCHANGE
Line Numbers
Plant menu: Toolbars > Line Numbers
Command Name
Command Line
548
NUMBERASSIGN
NUMBERANNOTATE
NUMBERSET
NUMBERCOUNT
NUMBER+
NUMBER-
Toolbars
UCS
Plant menu: Toolbars > UCS
Command Name
Flat - Places the current user coordinate system in the flat
position. For more information, see Flat (on page 267).
Command Line
VIEWFLAT
North - Places the current user coordinate system in the north VIEWNORTH
position. For more information, see North (on page 268).
South - Places the current user coordinate system in the
south position. For more information, see South (on page
269).
VIEWSOUTH
VIEWEAST
VIEWWEST
UCS
COMPASS
Steel
Plant menu: Toolbars > Steel
Command Name
Wide Flange - Places a wide flange shape. For more
information, see Wide Flange Shapes (on page 274).
Command Line
WSHAPE
LSHAPE
2LSHAPE
549
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
TSHAPE
Flat Bar - Places a flat bar shape. For more information, see
Flat Bar Shapes (on page 280).
FBSHAPE
Round Bar - Places a round bar shape. For more information, RBSHAPE
see Round Bar Shapes (on page 281).
550
PSHAPE
TSSHAPE
ZSHAPE
CLIPSHAPE
LLIPSHAPE
SPLATE
SBPLATE
SCOPE
SCUT
SMITER
SUNION
SCEDIT
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
COMP2STEEL
SAUTOCOPE
Frame Creation - Creates intelligent frames that they can use SFRAME
to build structural steel models. For more information, see
Steel - Frame Creation (on page 306).
Ladder - Places ladders, with or without cages, in the
drawing. For more information, see Ladder (on page 309).
SLADDER
SSTAIR
SHRAIL
Settings
Plant menu: Toolbars > Settings
Command Name
Command Line
SETUP
SETSPEC
SETSIZE
COMP2SIZE
COMP2SPEC
COMP2SIZESPEC
551
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
CURRENT
CONVERTDOUBLE
CONVERTSINGLE
CONVERTISO
552
XCEDIT
GCEDIT
CONNECTOG
Toolbars
Command Name
Command Line
ZOOMLOCK
SPECOPTION
GROUPTOG
SELECTCONTROL
Palettes
Plant menu: Toolbars > Misc
Command Name
Spec View - Filters the available components based on the
size and specification settings. For more information, see
Spec View Palette (on page 88).
Command Line
SPECVIEW
INSULATIONVIEW
DISCONTINUITYVIEW
P&ID View - Links data between the Plant and P&ID table in a PIDVIEW
project database. For more information, see P&ID View
Palette (on page 107).
553
Toolbars
554
APPENDIX A
Change the location of the Spec folder by modifying the SpecificationDirectory (on page 42)
variable stored in the current configuration settings.
555
556
APPENDIX B
558
The acad.rx file is in the support folder. AutoCAD uses acad.rx to load the Plant menus,
toolbars, and panels.
3. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.
4. Manually create the new support folder and copy the acad.rx file to this folder.
5. On the Files tab, expand Template Settings > Drawing Template File Location.
557
6. Select the folder name and type the new folder path.
7. Click OK.
To set up a profile for another user login on the same computer, run Start > All
Programs > CADWorx > Plant > Setup Profile - Plant.
558
559
ERASE
U
UNDO
REDO
MREDO
OOPS
BLOCK
-WBLOCK
EXPLODE
CUTCLIP
GROUP
Copy Commands
These commands add new graphic entities to the model.
COPY
BREAK
ARRAY
GRIP_COPY
GRIP_MIRROR
EXPLODE
MIRROR
PASTECLIP
PASTEORIG
DROPGEOM
Move Commands
These commands move the graphic entities in the model.
560
MOVE
GRIP_STRETCH
STRETCH
DROPGEOM
APPENDIX C
Update History
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2014 SP1
Software Enhancements
Updated the Nozzle Generic Attach command to improve the overall application of the
option. For more information, see Nozzle Generic Attach (on page 200).
You can now use alpha characters in the spool, mark, and sheet number in the ISOGEN
Data dialog box. For more information, see ISOGEN Data Dialog Box (on page 73).
You can now turn off updates for Custom Data, and Line Number in the Apply Change
Data Rule. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule Dialog Box (on page 54).
SP1 Improvements
Improved the Change Specification command to provide you a list of components in the
case of multiple matching components. For more information, see Change Specification (on
page 68).
Updated the Pipe Support Palette to reflect the new Specification Editor Pipe Support
changes and the use of dynamic pipe supports. This option also enables new pipe supports
on tees. For more information, see Support Modeler Palette (on page 94).
Tees can now be converted to crosses after routing by using the grip point on the main of
the tee.
Reducers can now have branches routed from the side with the added grip point.
Tubing can now be stretched only by using the square grip point at the end point of the tube
run. Also pipe can be routed from an existing tube. For more information, see Tube (on page
498).
Center of Gravity has now been updated. All center of gravity calculations can be completed
within a single dialog box. For more information, see C.G. Generator (on page 171).
Generic Attach has been updated to include the BOM Mark Point and the CG Location,
enabling you to select a point for the Center of Gravity. For more information, see Generic
Attach (on page 202) and Steel - Generic Attachment (on page 295).
561
Update History
562
OrthoGen capability has been added to CADWorx. For more information, see OrthoGen
Panel (on page 143).
Gaskets, Bolts, and Welds have been enhanced for appearance. They now appear as they
would in a real world environment when in enhanced mode.
There have been ISOGEN identifiers added to the ISOGEN Export Options for user shapes.
For more information, see ISOGEN Export Options (on page 182).
You can now set a minimum spacing rule for the O-Lets. For more information, see Apply Olet Minimum Spacing Rule (on page 55).
You can now have custom data that is attached to components appear in the data. You can
also isolate components based on this custom data. A Custom Data button has been added
to the Component Edit dialog box and the Global CEdit dialog box. For more information,
see Local Edit (on page 70), Global Edit (on page 79), Component Custom Data Dialog Box
(on page 78) and Custom Data Dialog Box (on page 80).
You can now review changes you have made to a database when you synchronize by
setting the SyncOnStartUp variable to Synchronize with Changes Review. For more
information, see SyncOnStartUp (on page 44) and Synchronize Pipe Database (on page
169).
You can now set the Routing Mode in the CADWorx Plant Setup. For more information,
Setup (on page 28).
You can now isolate the reverse of the selected items in the CADWorx Line View palette.
You can also manage your isolation in the Line View Isolation Properties Manager added
to the CADWorx Line View palette. You can set the file created in the Line View Isolation
Properties Manager to a default by setting it in the LineViewIsolationSettingsFile
variable. This also allows you to isolate based on custom data. For more information, see
Line View Palette (on page 91), Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) (on page 92),
Line View Isolation Properties Manager (on page 93), and LineViewIsolationSettingsFile (on
page 41).
You can now break pipes into segments and change segmented pipe to non-segmented
pipe. For more information, see Join Pipe (on page 175) and Break Pipe (on page 200).
You can now change the elevation of placed piping in the drawing. For more information,
see Change Elevation (on page 207).
You can now generic attach for nozzles using the ENGENERIC command. For more
information, see Nozzle Generic Attach (on page 200).
You can now enable the RepeatFile in ISOGEN which enables start and split locations for
consecutive ISOGEN outputs. Set the ISOGENSetting variable to control the import of the
repeat file data. The number of sheets is then added to the ISOGEN Data dialog box. For
more information, see ISOGENSetting (on page 38) and ISOGEN Out (on page 118).
Intersecting piping components can now be converted. Options are presented to you when a
piping component crosses another component. If you selected None from the list, you can
use the CONVERTINTERSECTEDPIPINGS command to convert the intersecting piping. For
more information, see Convert Intersected Piping (on page 84).
Update History
Items added and updated with CADWorx Plant Professional 2013 R2
Software Enhancements
You can now have CADWorx automatically add couplings between components with the
Apply Auto Coupling Rule. For more information, see Apply Auto Coupling Rule (on page
52) in Piping Rules (on page 49).
You can now have CADWorx automatically check the line number when inserting
components in a line with the Apply Line Number Rule. For more information, see Apply
Line Number Rule (on page 53) in Piping Rules (on page 49).
You can now decide which items CADWorx automatically updates when using the Change
Size, Change Spec, or automatic update of data options with the Apply Change Data
Rule. For more information, see Apply Change Data Rule (on page 54).
You can now have CADWorx audit your data on startup to check for removed XDATA using
AuditDataOnStartup variable. For more information, see AuditDataOnStartup (on page 33).
You can now see which components have had XDATA removed by using the
CWSHOWNOXD command. For more information, see Show Removed XDATA (on page
33).
You can now restore XDATA to components that have had XDATA removed by using the
CWADDXD command. For more information, see Restore XDATA (on page 33).
You can display help by typing MANUAL on the command line. For more information, see
Online Help (on page 23).
You can now select your drawing environment type by the Drawing Prototype variable. For
more information, see Drawing Prototype (on page 32).
You can now convert components into 3D Enhanced mode. For more information, see
Convert to 3D enhanced (on page 83).
You can now update the project data of components in your drawing by using the
CONVERTFROMPRJDATA command. For more information, see Convert from project data
(on page 83).
You can now change CADWorx Components to AutoCAD 3D solids with xdata by using the
CWEXPLODE command. For more information, see CWexplode (on page 84).
You can now edit the assembly path of an assembly using the ASSEMBLYEDITPATHS
command. For more information, see Edit an assembly path (on page 115).
You can now redefine connection points for a user shape by using the EDITUSERSHAPE
command. For more information, see Edit by redefining connection points (on page 181).
563
Update History
You can now use the PIPW1 (Buttweld pipe), PIPF1 (Socket Weld or Threaded pipe), and
PIPFL1 (Flanged pipe) commands to draw single pipe components. For more information,
see Pipe (on page 375).
ElbowCenterLines are only available in 2D and Isometric modes. For more information, see
ElbowCenterLine (on page 37).
Detail information has been added to LayerByLineNumber. For more information, see
LayerByLineNumber (on page 39).
You can now reload a project file after changes have been made by clicking Reload File.
For more information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 46).
You can now stop xdata from appearing in the bill of materials or components by using the
CONVERTEXISTING command. This command was previously known as the EXIST
command. For more information, see Convert Existing (on page 83).
You can now refresh your project from changes made to your selected specification by
clicking Reload*.prj File. For more information, see Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View
Palette) (on page 88).
You can now reload the global file by right clicking and selecting Reload Global File. For
more information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 113).
564
You can now change the size of components by using the CHANGESIZE command. For
more information, see Change Size (on page 61).
You can now change the specification of components by using the CHANGESPEC
command. For more information, see Change Specification (on page 68).
You can now create assemblies using the CADWorx Assembly Manager. For more
information, see Assembly View Palette (on page 113).
You can now auto route all components using the ROUTE command. For more information,
see Auto Route (on page 221).
You can now set Piping Rules for CADWorx. For more information, see Piping Rules (on
page 49) in Setup (on page 28).
Toolbars (on page 369) contain more information on how to model in 3D Modeling versus
2D Modeling (on page 370), Plane versus Isometrics view modes (on page 370), the
Compass (on page 370), and on Connecting to components (on page 370) for the new
features in CADWorx.
You can now change the variable setting in the Configuration Settings in CADWorx Plant
Setup. For more information, see Configuration Settings (on page 31).
You can now set your specification and size in the CADWorx Plant Setup. For more
information, see Set Specification and Size (on page 46).
You can now update your configuration layers in CADWorx Plant Setup. For more
information, see Configuration Layers (on page 47).
CADWorx now incorporates a new Spec Editor program. For more information see Editor
(on page 61) or the CADWorx Spec Editor Users Guide.
Updated all panels and toolbars to reflect changes throughout the software.
Index
2
2D Double Line 82
2D Panel 211
2D Representation 211
2D Representation Hidden 212
2D Single Line 82
3
3D Modeling versus 2D Modeling 370
3D Solids 82
3-Way Plan Valve 423
3-Way Side Valve 425
3-Way Vertical Valve 426
4
45 LR Ell 387
4-Way Plan Valve 424
4-Way Side Valve 426
9
90 LR Ell 386
90 SR Ell 387
A
Accessing and Docking the Toolbars 369
Add a user shape to a specification 196
Add an HVAC shape to the drawing 348
Add or remove properties from BOM 155,
333, 358
Adjust a dimension to match a pipe 209
Adjust a pipe length to match a dimension
209
Adjustable Bend 384
Aliases and Command Names 370
All 61
AlphaSizeControl 32
Anchor 262
Angle Double Shape 285
Angle Shape with Lip 283
Angle Shapes 276
Angle Side Valve 428
Angle Top Valve 425
Annotate 150
Annotate Component 328
Apply Auto Coupling Rule 52
B
Ball Valve 417
Base Plate 290
Bill of Material Setup 154
Bleed Ring or Spacer 544
Blind Flange 406
Bolt 215
BoltRoundControl 35
565
Index
BOM Sort Order / Accumulation Dialog Box
157
BomBoltControl 34
BomScheduleDirection 34
BomScheduleSpacing 34
BomTagGridFactor 34
BomTagOptimize 35
BomTagRadiusFactor 35
BomTagSpacingFactor 35
Box 212
Break by Length 200
Break by Number 200
Break Pipe 200
Butterfly Valve 420
Buttweld 371
Buttweld LR 227
Buttweld SR 227
Buttweld Valves 415
C
C.G. Generator 171
CADWorx Legacy Drawing - Match
Specifications Dialog Box 56
CADWorxMaterial 35
CAESARIIMaterial 36
CAESARIIMemory 36
CAESARIITolerance 36
CAESARIIVersion 36
Cap 381
Center Line 55
Change 233
Change Elevation 207
Change elevation by BOP 208
Change elevation by entering the elevation
value 207
Change elevation by Pick 208
Change elevation by TOP 208
Change Layer 256
Change position and direction of generic
nozzle 202
Change Size 61
Change Specification 68
Change tee sizes automatically 65
Change tee sizes manually 66
Change text alignment in columns 156,
333, 359
Change the BOM sorting and accumulation
156, 333, 359
Change the column order 156, 333, 359
Change the Elevation 233
Change the layer associated with an object
256
566
Index
Creating a Base Profile 558
Cross Plan 462
Cross Reducing Plan 462
Cross Reducing Side 478
Cross Reducing Vertical 479
Cross Side 478
Custom Data Dialog Box 80
Custom Data Tab (CADWorx Spec View
Palette) 91
Cut 319
Cut BOM using Automatic placement 158,
335, 361
Cut BOM using Manual placement 159,
336, 361
Cut HVAC Bill of Material 360
Cut members by line 319
Cut members by three-point plane 319
Cut Pipe Bill of Material 157
Cut Steel Bill of Material 334
CWexplode 84
D
Data Remove 364
DataBaseCodesISOGEN 36
DB Generate 365
DB In 366
Decrement 149
Define a weld gap 539
Delete a layer 257
Delete an assembly from the Assembly
Manager 115
Delete Bill of Material 163
Delete Layer 256
Detail 242
Diaphragm Valve 421
Dim Adjustment 208
Dimension Panel 229
DimensionsExcludedSlope 37
DimensionsExistingISOGEN 37
Discontinuity View Palette 104
Display only the layer associated with an
object 258
Dots 250
Draw non-pipe components 89
Draw pipe components 89
Drawing Prototype 32
Dual Check Valve 422
E
East 270
Ecc Reducer 380
F
Fiberglass 434
Fiberglass Pipe 437
Find Legacy Components Dialog Box 58
Find Tab (CADWorx Line View Palette) 93
FittingWidth 37
Flange O.D. 253
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Plan 443
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Side 450
Flanged 45 Degree Elbow Vert 450
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Plan 442
Flanged 90 Degree Elbow Side 449
Flanged Concentric Reducer 444
567
Index
Flanged Plan 543
Flanged Side 546
Flanged Tee Plan 444
Flanged Tee Side 451
Flanged Tee Vertical 451
Flanges 402
Flat 267
Flat Bar Shapes 280
Flgd/BW Valves 415
Frame Annotation 308
Full Coupling End 448
G
Gasket 538
Gaskets, Etc. 538
Gate Valve 417
GC Edit 356
Generate a CAESAR II input file 198
Generic Attach 202, 354
Global Edit 79, 325
Global Edit All 325
Globe Valve 418
Graphics / Pipe Ends 237
Group On/Off 175
Guide 264
H
Handrail 312
Height 236
Hidden End 253
Horizontal 230
Horizontal with Tail 232
HVAC 346
HVAC BOM Setup 357
HVAC Draw / BOM / DB Panel 345
HVAC Shapes Catalog 348
HVACLibraryDirectory 37
I
Import CADWorx HVAC data 366
Import Pipe 168
Import Pipe Bill of Material 163
Import Steel 342
Import Steel Model 344
Increment 149
Insert a drawing into the project 110
Insert a flange O.D. 253
Insert a gasket 539
Insert a hidden end 254
Insert a pipe end 254
Insert a pipe support 96
568
J
Join by Run 176
Join by Segment 176
Join Pipe 175
L
Label components with line numbers 150
Ladder 309
LanguageFile 38
Lap Joint Flange 409
Lateral Plan 463
Lateral Side 479
Lateral Vertical 480
Latrolet Socket Weld in Plan 510
Latrolet Socket Weld in Side 523
Latrolet Thread in Plan 510
Latrolet Thread in Side 522
Latrolet Weld in Plan 509
Latrolet Weld in Side 522
Layer Change 328, 364
Layer Off 257
Layer On 257
LayerByLineNumber 39
Index
Layers Dialog Box 113
Layers Panel 255
Line 151
Line Isolate 151
Line Isolate Tab (CADWorx Line View
Palette) 92
Line Numbering System Dialog Box 146
Line Numbering System Dropdown Setup
Dialog Box 90
Line Numbers 548
Line View Isolation Properties Manager 93
Line View Palette 91
Lined 428
Lined Eccentric Reducer 431
Lined Pipe 431
Lined Wye Plan 432
Lined Wye Side 433
Lined Wye Vert 433
LineNumberSystem 41
LineViewIsolationSettingsFile 41
Link components 109
LNum Panel 145
Local Edit 70
Loft 299
Long Weld Neck 410
M
Match an object's layer 257
Match Layer 257
Matched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View
Palette) 107
Material List Definition 130
Misc 251, 541
Misc Panel 173
Miter 318
Miters 383
Mode Convert 81
Modeling in 2D 390, 425, 433, 445, 474,
511, 535, 546
Modeling in 3D 375, 417, 431, 437, 459,
496, 526, 543
Modify a component 72
Modify a user-defined HVAC shape 354
Modify an HVAC shape 348
Modify an HVAC shape from the catalog
351
Modify multiple components 80
Modifying a User Profile 557
Moveline 225
MVSetup 25
N
Nipolet Thread in Plan 511
Nipolet Thread in Vertical 523
Nipolet Weld in Plan 510
Nipolet Weld in Vertical 523
Nipple 497
Non Standard 219
North 268
Nozzle Generic Attach 200
O
Obsolete Commands 22
Offset Tap 125
Online Help 23
Operators 548
Optional Component Dialog Box 59
Optional Items 59
Options Dialog Box 112
OrthoGen Launch 143
OrthoGen Out 143
OrthoGen Panel 143
P
P&ID View Palette 107
Palettes 553
Palettes Panel 87
PCF In 129
PCF Out 128
Pipe 375
Pipe BOM / DB Panel 153
Pipe End 254
Pipe Ends 540
Pipe Shapes 278
Pipe Support Report 106
PipeDescriptionCat 41
PipeSupportSetting 42
Piping Rules 49
Place a 180 degree plan return 379
Place a 180 degree side return 395, 396
Place a 180 degree vertical return 395,
396
Place a 3-way plan valve 423, 472, 532
Place a 3-way side valve 426, 485, 536
Place a 3-way vertical valve 426, 486, 536
Place a 45 degree rolled elbow 388
Place a 4-way plan valve 424, 532
Place a 4-way side valve 426, 536
Place a 90 degree plan elbow 376, 438,
443, 459, 499
Place a 90 degree reducing plan elbow
377, 460, 501
569
Index
Place a 90 degree rolled elbow 386, 387
Place a 90 degree side street elbow 512
Place a 90 degree street plan elbow 500
Place a base plate 292
Place a base plate with holes 292
Place a bleed ring 544
Place a bushing 442, 506
Place a cap 381, 442, 468, 504
Place a concentric reducer 380, 439, 444,
466, 503
Place a concentric reducer swage 502
Place a coupling 441, 467, 468, 506, 507
Place a coupling end 448, 517, 518
Place a detail graphic 242
Place a fiberglass pipe 437
Place a flange 406, 409
Place a flange on a pipe 403, 405, 407,
408, 411, 412, 414
Place a flange that mates with another
flange 404, 405, 407, 408, 411, 413,
414
Place a frame in the drawing 308
Place a gasket automatically 216
Place a gasket manually 216
Place a generic attachment in the drawing
204, 355
Place a guide 264
Place a ladder interactively 311
Place a ladder using key-ins 311
Place a ladder with a cage 311
Place a miscellaneous graphic 252
Place a mitered pipe 383
Place a multi-port valve 473, 474
Place a nipple 497
Place a nonsymmetrical user shape in the
drawing 197
Place a nozzle generic attachment 201
Place a pipe 375, 431
Place a plan cross 381, 440, 462, 505
Place a plan elbow 377, 389, 438, 443,
460, 464, 465, 500
Place a plan elbowlet fitting 508, 509
Place a plan fitting 507, 508, 510, 511
Place a plan flange pipe 543
Place a plan flanged tee 444
Place a plan graphic 243
Place a plan lateral 382, 441, 463, 464,
505
Place a plan latrolet fitting 509, 510
Place a plan reducing cross 382
Place a plan sock-o-let 442
Place a plan tee 378, 439, 461, 501, 502
Place a plan wye 390, 432, 468
570
Index
Place a vertical strainer 451
Place a vertical tee 393, 394, 447, 477,
478, 515, 516
Place a vertical wye 401, 433, 485
Place a weld dot graphic 251
Place a weld symbol graphic 248
Place an adjustable bend 385
Place an anchor 262
Place an angle side valve 427, 428, 486,
537
Place an angle top valve 533
Place an angle valve 424, 425, 472
Place an arrow head graphic 246
Place an eccentric reducer 380, 432, 440,
467, 504
Place an eccentric reducer swage 503
Place an elevation graphic 245
Place an expansion joint 545
Place an HVAC shape from the catalog
351
Place an instrument graphic 244
Place an isometric symbol graphic 250
Place an offset tap 128
Place automatic dimensions 230
Place component annotation 234
Place component elevation annotation 235
Place coordinates 235
Place hand rail by points 313
Place hand rail by polyline 313
Place horizontal dimensions 230
Place horizontal tailed dimensions 232
Place nonstandard stud bolts 220
Place plate by closed polyline 289
Place plate by curves 290
Place plate by points 289
Place rotated dimensions 232
Place standard stud bolts 219
Place stud bolts automatically 216
Place stud bolts manually 217
Place tick marks 236
Place tubing 498
Place vertical dimensions 231
Place vertical tailed dimensions 233
Place weld gaps automatically 217
Place weld gaps manually 218
Plain End 253
Plan 243
Plan 11.25 Ell 388
Plan 180 LR Return 379
Plan 180 SR Return 379
Plan 22.5 Ell 389
Plan 45 Ell 377
Plan 90 LR Ell 375
R
Read a CAESAR II input file 207
Re-associate the Components 210
Redisplay a layer turned off by the Layer
Off command 257
Reducing Slip-on Flange 410
Reducing Tee Plan 461
Reducing Tee Side 477
Reducing Tee Vertical 478
Reducing Threaded Flange 412
Reducing Weld Neck Flange 413
Reinforcing Pad 260
Reinforcing Saddle 260, 545
Relief Side Valve 424
Relief Top Valve 427
Remove CADWorx data from components
364
Restore XDATA 33
Restraints 540
Restraints Panel 259
Rigid Element 546
Rolled Pipe 383
Rotary Valve 421
Rotated 232
Rotational 263
Round Bar Shapes 281
Route from a generic nozzle 202
Route skewed pipe 224
Router 225
Router commands 226
RT Panel 221
Running CADWorx Equipment or PV
Fabricator with CADWorx Plant 558
571
Index
S
Saddle in Vertical 449
Sanitary 452
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Plan 465
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Side 482
Sanitary 11.25 Ell Vertical 483
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Plan 464
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Side 481
Sanitary 22.5 Ell Vertical 482
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Plan 472
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Side 485
Sanitary 3-Way Valve Vertical 485
Sanitary 45 Ell Plan 460
Sanitary 45 Ell Side 475
Sanitary 45 Ell Vertical 476
Sanitary 90 Ell Plan 459
Sanitary 90 Ell Side 474
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Plan 460
Sanitary 90 Reducing Ell Side 475
Sanitary Angle Valve Plan 472
Sanitary Angle Valve Side 486
Sanitary Ball Valve 469
Sanitary Butterfly Valve 471
Sanitary Cap 468
Sanitary Check Valve 471
Sanitary Concentric 466
Sanitary Eccentric 466
Sanitary Gate Valve 469
Sanitary Globe Valve 470
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Plan 463
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Side 480
Sanitary Lateral Reducing Vertical 481
Sanitary Multi 1 Port Valve 473
Sanitary Multi 2 Port Valve 473
Sanitary Multi 3 Port Valve 473
Sanitary Nut/Coupling 468
Sanitary Plug Valve 470
Sanitary Stub 467
Sanitary Tee Plan 461
Sanitary Tee Side 476
Sanitary Tee Vertical 477
Sanitary U-Bend Plan 465
Sanitary U-Bend Side 483
Sanitary U-Bend Vertical 484
Sanitary Wye Plan 467
Sanitary Wye Side 484
Sanitary Wye Vertical 485
SaveLastProfileUsed 42
Section 240
Select Control 329
Select Item Dialog Box 166
Set 147, 231
572
Index
Size 60
Size-Spec 61
SKEY Information 131
Slip-on Flange 404
Snubber 263
Socket Type Flange 406
Socket Weld 84, 228
Sock-O-Let 442
Sockolet Socket Weld in Plan 508
Sockolet Socket Weld in Vertical 519
South 269
Spec 60
Spec Editor 89
Spec View Palette 88
Spec View Tab (CADWorx Spec View
Palette) 88
Special Monitored Commands Used With a
Live Database 560
Specification and Data Files 555
Specification and Size 59
SpecificationDefaultProject 43
SpecificationDirectory 42
Specify the Bill of Material Mark Point and
the Center of Gravity Location 205
Specify the weld dot size for a single line
pipe 175
SpecSizeOverride 43
Spectacle Blind Side 545
Spectacle Blind Vertical 547
Spring Hanger 262
Stair 313
Standard 219
Start a new route 223
Startup Defaults 25
Startup Variables 31
Steel 549
Steel - Cope 318
Steel - Frame Creation 306
Steel - Generic Attachment 295
Steel Bolts 292
Steel BOM / DB Panel 331
Steel BOM Setup 332
Steel BOM Sort Order / Accumulation
Dialog Box 334
Steel Draw Panel 287
Steel Edit Panel 317
Steel Shapes Panel 271
SteelCopeBoltDistance 43
SteelCopeWeldDistance 43
SteelLibraryDirectory 43
SteelNeutralAxis 43
SteelPartNumberFile 44
SteelRoundControl 44
SteelRoundUnit 44
SteelToolTipSetting 44
Stop Sign 124
Stub End 409
Support Directory 25
Support Modeler Palette 94
SW/Thrd Plan 544
SW/Thrd Side 547
Synchronize HVAC Database 367
Synchronize Pipe Database 169
Synchronize Steel Database 343
Synchronize the HVAC database 367
SyncOnStartUp 44
System In 206
System Out 198
System Prompts 239
System Visibility 210
SystemMeasure 45
T
Tag Location 163
Tag Toggle Bill of Material 163
Tap 129
Technical Support 18
Tee 388
Tee Shapes 277
TemplateDatabaseFile 45
Thrd/SW 3 Way Plan 531
Thrd/SW 3 Way Side 535
Thrd/SW 3 Way Vertical 536
Thrd/SW 4 Way Plan 532
Thrd/SW 4 Way Side 536
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Plan 500
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Side 512
Thrd/SW 45 Ell Vert 513
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Plan 499
Thrd/SW 90 Ell Side 511
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Plan 501
Thrd/SW 90 Red Ell Side 513
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Plan 499
Thrd/SW 90 Street Ell Side 512
Thrd/SW Angle Side 537
Thrd/SW Angle Top 533
Thrd/SW Ball 527
Thrd/SW Bush/Insert 506
Thrd/SW Cap 504
Thrd/SW Check 528
Thrd/SW Conc Swage 502
Thrd/SW Conc w/Hub 503
Thrd/SW Control 531
Thrd/SW Cross Plan 504
Thrd/SW Cross Side 516
573
Index
Thrd/SW Diaphragm 529
Thrd/SW Dual Check 530
Thrd/SW Ecc Swage 503
Thrd/SW Ecc w/Hub 504
Thrd/SW Full Clpg End 517
Thrd/SW Full Clpg Plan 506
Thrd/SW Gage 533
Thrd/SW Gate 526
Thrd/SW Globe 527
Thrd/SW Half Clpg End 517
Thrd/SW Half Clpg Plan 507
Thrd/SW Lateral Plan 505
Thrd/SW Lateral Side 516
Thrd/SW Lateral Vert 517
Thrd/SW Needle 529
Thrd/SW Pipe 496
Thrd/SW Plug 505, 528
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg End 518
Thrd/SW Reducing Clpg Plan 507
Thrd/SW Relief Side 532
Thrd/SW Relief Top 537
Thrd/SW Rotary 530
Thrd/SW Tee Plan 501
Thrd/SW Tee Red Plan 502
Thrd/SW Tee Red Side 515
Thrd/SW Tee Red Vert 515
Thrd/SW Tee Side 514
Thrd/SW Tee Vert 514
Thrd/SW Union 511
Thrd/SW Valves 524
Threaded 84, 228
Threaded Flange 408
Threaded/Socket 491
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Plan
438
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Side
445
Threaded/Socket 45 Degree Elbow Vert
446
Threaded/Socket Cap 441
Threaded/Socket Concentric Reducer 439
Threaded/Socket Eccentric Reducer 440
Threaded/Socket Insert/Bushing 442
Threaded/Socket Lateral Plan 441
Threaded/Socket Lateral Side 447
Threaded/Socket Lateral Vert 448
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Plan 440
Threaded/Socket Straight Cross Side 447
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Plan 439
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Side 446
Threaded/Socket Straight Tee Vert 447
Threadolet Thread in Plan 508
Threadolet Thread in Vertical 519
574
U
UCS 549
UCS Next 268
UCS Object 270
UCS Panel 265
Union 320
Un-Isolate Layer 258
Unlink components 109
Unmatched Tab (CADWorx P&ID View
Palette) 110
Update History 561
UseObjectsFromXrefs 46
User Shape 296, 351
User Shapes 176
V
Vert 11.25 Ell 399
Vert 180 LR Return 395
Vert 180 SR Return 396
Vert 22.5 Ell 400
Vert 45 Ell 392
Vert Lateral 398
Vert Reducing Cross 397
Vert Reducing Tee 394
Vert Tee 393
Vert Wye 401
Vertical 231
Vertical with Tail 233
Victaulic 486
View Clip 265
Index
W
Weld 247
Weld Gap 539
Weld Neck Flange 403
Weld Size 175
Weld Total 218
WeldDotSize 46
WeldGapToDB 46
Weldolet Weld in Plan 507
Weldolet Weld in Vertical 518
West 269
What's New in Plant 21
Wide Flange Shapes 274
X
X-Body Gate BW 534
X-Body Gate SW 535
X-Body Gate Thrd 534
XREF Edit 85
Z
Z Shapes 284
Zoom Factors 214
Zoom Lock 214
575